7
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-
ble to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-
nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-
ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-
tion.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2016 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in
whole or in part without the written consent of Kia Motors
America, Inc.
Printed in U.S.A.
Foreword
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process /
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle
Keys / Door locks / Liftgate / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors /
Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system / Active ECO system
/ BSD (Blind Spot Detection) system / LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
What to do in an emergency
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid /
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
table of contents
1
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol. . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Operation in foreign countries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle handling instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . 1-6
Introduction
21
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. In order to minimize
the chance of death or injury, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this
manual. These WARNINGs were pre-
pared to enhance your personal safe-
ty.You should carefully read and follow
ALL procedures and recommenda-
tions provided in these WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
✽✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having a pump
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. (Do not use methanol blend-
ed fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)
• Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situa-
tion in which harm, serious bod-
ily injury or death could result if
the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
13
Introduction
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 15% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results.
Methanol may cause drivability prob-
lems and damage to the fuel system,
engine control system and emission
control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
3. Gasohol containing more than 15
percent ethanol
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-
ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recom-
mends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceed-
ing 15 percent.
✽✽
NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
does not cover damage to the fuel sys-
tem or any performance problems
caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never use any fuel containing
methanol. Discontinue use of any
methanol containing product which
may inhibit proper drivability.
WARNING - Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.
Introduction
41
Other fuels
Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si),
MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene
(Fe), and Other metalic additives,
may cause vehicle and engine dam-
age or cause misfiring, poor acceler-
ation, engine stalling, catalyst melt-
ing, clogging, abnormal corrosion,
life cycle reduction, etc.
Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
✽✽
NOTICE
Damage to the fuel system or per-
formance problem caused by the use
of these fuels may not be covered by
your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful man-
ganese-based fuel additives Such as
MMT(Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl). Kia does not
recommend the use of gasoline con-
taining MMT. This type of fuel can
reduce vehicle performance and affect
your emission control system. The
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the
cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-
hol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and damage components
of the fuel system, engine control sys-
tem and emission control system.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help pre-
vent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance performance
of the Emission Control System. For
more information on TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, please go to the
website (www.toptiergas.com)
For customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately may
be added to the gasoline.
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive should
be added to the fuel tank at every
7,500miles or every engine oil change
is recommended. Additives are avail-
able from your authorized Kia dealer
along with information on how to use
them. Do not mix other additives.
15
Introduction
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correct-
ly may result in loss of control, an
accident or vehicle rollover.
Specific design characteristics (high-
er ground clearance, track, etc.) give
this vehicle a higher center of gravity
than other types of vehicles. In other
words they are not designed for cor-
nering at the same speeds as con-
ventional 2-wheel drive vehicles.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers. Again, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
control, an accident or vehicle
rollover. Be sure to read the
“Reducing the risk of a rollover”
driving guidelines, in section 5 of
this manual.
No special break-in period is need-
ed. By following a few simple precau-
tions for the first 600 miles (1,000
km) you may add to the perform-
ance, economy and life of your vehi-
cle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first
1,200 miles (2,000 km) of opera-
tion.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
VEHICLE HANDLING
INSTRUCTIONS
Introduction
61
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of per-
sonally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investiga-
tion.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Hood......................................................4-42
2. Head lamp..................................4-115, 7-85
3. Fog lamp ....................................4-117, 7-85
4. Wheel and tire................................7-53, 8-4
5. Outside rearview mirror.........................4-68
6. Panoramic sunroof ................................4-48
7. Front windshield wiper blades....4-121, 7-48
8. Windows................................................4-38
OUMA014001
■ Front view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
23
Your vehicle at a glance
9. Door locks .............................................4-21
10. Fuel filler lid .........................................4-44
11. Rear combination lamp .......................7-90
12. High mounted stop lamp .....................7-92
13. Rear window wiper blade.........4-119, 7-48
14. Liftgate.................................................4-27
15. Rearview camera ..............................4-112
16. Parking assist system .......................4-108
OUMA014002
■ Rear view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
42
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle...................................4-22
2. Power window switch...............................4-39
3. Central door lock switch ..........................4-23
4. Power window lock button .......................4-41
5. Outside rearview mirror control...............4-69
6. Outside rearview mirror folding ...............4-71
7. Fuel filler lid open button .........................4-44
8. Power liftgate open/close button ................4-29
9. Instrument panel illumination control ......4-73
10. BSD On/Off button.................................5-85
11. LDWS On/Off button..............................5-92
12. AC inverter button................................4-164
13. ESC off button .......................................5-42
14. Steering wheel.......................................4-54
15. Tilt and telescopic steering
control lever ...........................................4-55
16. Inner fuse panel.....................................7-69
17. Brake pedal............................................5-27
18. Hood release lever.................................4-42
19. Seat..........................................................3-2
OUMA014003
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
25
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Driver’s front air bag ............................3-57
2. Horn.....................................................4-57
3. Instrument cluster................................4-72
4. Wiper and washer control lever.........4-119
5. Ignition switch or
Engine start/stop button.................5-6, 5-9
6. Cruise control / Advanced smart
cruise control..............................5-62, 5-66
7. Hazard warning flasher .........................6-2
8. Climate control system...........4-128, 4-139
9. Shift lever.............................................5-13
10. Front seat warmer /
Seat cooler...........................4-161, 4-162
11. Heated steering wheel button ...........4-56
12. Drive mode button.............................5-81
13. AWD Lock button...............................5-20
14. Surround view monitoring system
On/Off button...................................4-113
15. Rear parking assist system
On/Off button...................................4-108
16. Electronic parking brake
(EPB) button......................................5-30
17. AUTO HOLD button...........................5-37
18. USB charger....................................4-166
19. Power outlet.....................................4-163
20. AC inverter ......................................4-164
21. Glove box ........................................4-157
22. Passenger’s front air bag ..................3-57
23. Center console storage box ............4-157
OUMA014004
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
62
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OUM074100L
■■
Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - GDI
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-38
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-36
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-40
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-43
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-71
6. Negative battery terminal..................7-50
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-50
8. Radiator cap .....................................7-39
9. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-35
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir...7-41
27
Your vehicle at a glance
OUM074115L
■■
Gasoline Engine (THETA 2.0L) T-GDI
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-38
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-36
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-40
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-43
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-71
6. Negative battery terminal..................7-50
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-50
8. Radiator cap .....................................7-39
9. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-35
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir...7-41
Your vehicle at a glance
82
OUMA074001
■■
Gasoline Engine (Lambda 3.3L) - GDI
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-38
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-36
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-40
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-43
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-71
6. Negative battery terminal..................7-50
7. Positive battery terminal ...................7-50
8. Radiator cap .....................................7-39
9. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-35
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir...7-41
Safety features of your vehicle
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
• Front seat adjustment - manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
• Front seat adjustment - power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
• Driver position memory system (for power seat). . . . 3-9
• Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
• Seatback pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
• Headrest (for rear seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
• Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
• Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
• Seat belt precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
• Child restraint system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
• Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Air bag
- advanced supplemental restraint system. . . . . 3-44
• How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
• Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
• Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
• Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
• Inflation and non-inflation conditions
of the air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
• SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
• Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Cushion extension (Driver's seat)*
(6) Driver position memory system
(7) Headrest
2nd row seat
(8) Forward and backward
(9) Seatback angle and folding
(10) Walk-in seat lever*
(11) Headrest
(12) Armrest
(13) Remote folding*
3rd row seat*
(14) Seatback folding
(15) Headrest
* : if equipped
SEATS
OUMA034001
■ Manual seat
■ Power seat
33
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
Do not press the release lever
on a manual seatback without
holding and controlling the
seatback. The seatback will
spring upright possibly impact-
ing you or other passengers.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Do not place anything in the dri-
ver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the dri-
ver's foot area could interfere
with the operation of the foot
pedals.
WARNING - Driver respon-
sibility for passengers
The driver must advise the pas-
senger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the occupant's hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt, applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen.
1KMN3662
WARNING - Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sit-
ting cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.
Safety features of your vehicle
43
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This could result in loss
of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback and seatback
adjustment.
• Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of the your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do so
can result in air bag inflation
injuries to the driver.
WARNING - Unexpected
Seat Movement
After adjusting a manual seat,
always check that it is locked by
shifting your weight to the front
and back. Sudden or unexpect-
ed movement of the driver's
seat could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle.
WARNING - Rear seatbacks
Always lock the rear seatback
before driving. Failure to do so
could result in passengers or
objects being thrown forward
injuring vehicle occupants.
WARNING - Luggage and
Cargo
Do not stack pile or stack lug-
gage or cargo higher than the
seatback in the cargo area. In an
accident the cargo could strike
and injury a passenger. If
objects are large, heavy or must
be piled, they must be secured
in the cargo area.
WARNING - Cargo Area
Do not allow passengers to ride
in the cargo area under any cir-
cumstance. The cargo area is
solely for the purpose of trans-
porting luggage or cargo.
35
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat adjustment - manual
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or back-
ward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the
seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
OUM034002
OUM034004
WARNING - Seat
adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
WARNING - Small
Objects
Use extreme caution when pick-
ing small objects trapped under
the seats or between the seat
and the center console. Your
hands might be cut or injured
by the sharp edges of the seats
mechanism.
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Seat height (if equipped)
To change the height of the seat,
push the lever upwards or down-
wards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the
lever up several times.
Lumbar support (if equipped)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the seat.
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
Front seat adjustment - power
(if equipped)
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the
proper position so you can easily con-
trol the steering wheel, pedals and
switches on the instrument panel.
CAUTION - Power seat
adjustments
The power seating controls
function by electronic motor.
Excessive operation may cause
damage to the electrical equip-
ment.
WARNING - Unattended
children
Do not leave children unattend-
ed in the vehicle. Children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them.
OUM034068
OUM034003
37
Safety features of your vehicle
When in operation, the power seat-
consumes a large amount of electri-
cal power. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, don’t adjust
the power seat longer than neces-
sary while the engine is not running.
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Cushion extension
(for driver's seat, if equipped)
Press the front portion of the switch
to raise the cushion extension, or the
rear portion of the switch to lower it.
Release the switch once the cushion
extension reaches the desired posi-
tion.
CAUTION - Power Seating
Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
damage the power seat motor or
electrical components.
OUM034006
OUM034072L
Safety features of your vehicle
83
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Seat height (if equipped)
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or press down to
lower the front part of the seat cush-
ion. Pull the rear portion of the con-
trol switch up to raise or press down
to lower the rear part of the seat
cushion. Release the switch once the
seat reaches the desired position.
Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support
switch on the side of the seat.
Type A
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support, or the
rear portion of the switch, to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reach-
es the desired position.
OUM034008 OUM034068
■ Type A
OUM034007
39
Safety features of your vehicle
Type B
1. Press the front portion of the
switch (1) to increase support, or
the rear portion of the switch (2),
to decrease support.
2. Move the support position up and
down by pressing the switch (3) or
(4).
3. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Driver position memory system
(if equipped, for power seat)
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driv-
er seat and outside rearview mirror
position with a simple button opera-
tion. By saving the desired position
into the system memory, different
drivers can reposition the driver seat
based upon their driving preference.
If the battery is disconnected, the
desired seat position memory will
need to be re-saved.
WARNING
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury.
OUM034073L
■ Type B
OUM034032
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
engine start/stop button is ON or
ignition switch ON.
2. Adjust the driver’s seat and out-
side rearview mirror comfortable
for the driver.
3. Press SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4. Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button. The sys-
tem will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
When recalling an adjustment mem-
ory button while sitting in the vehicle,
you can be surprised by the setting
chosen if the memory has been
adjusted by someone else. If that
occurs, immediately push the seat
position control knob in the direction
of the desired position to stop further
undesired movement.
Recalling positions from memory
1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
engine start/stop button is ON or
ignition switch ON.
2. To recall the position in the memo-
ry, press the desired memory but-
ton (1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver’s seat will
automatically adjust to the stored
position.
Adjusting the control switch for the
driver’s seat while the system is
recalling the stored position will
cause the movement to stop and
move in the direction that the control
switch is moved.
311
Safety features of your vehicle
Easy access function
(if equipped)
The system will move the driver's
seat automatically as follows:
• Without smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the ignition key is
removed.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the ignition key is
inserted.
• With smart key system
- It will move the driver’s seat rear-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the OFF
position.
- It will move the driver’s seat for-
ward when the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate this fea-
ture. Refer to "User settings" in chap-
ter 4.
Headrest (for front seat)
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passenger,
but also helps protect the head and
neck in the event of a rear collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
OHM038048N
Safety features of your vehicle
123
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward to 4 different positions by
pulling the headrest forward to the
desired detent. To adjust the head-
rest to it’s full rearward position.
OUM034010
OUM034075L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OUM034011
OUM034011L
OUMA036011
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type C
313
Safety features of your vehicle
Type A
Pull it fully forward to the farthest
position and release it.
Type B
Press and hold the release button
(1), and adjust position of the head-
rest.
Adjust the headrest so that it properly
supports the head and neck.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the headrest and seat
cushion raised, the headrest may
come in contact with the sunvisor or
other parts of the vehicle.
Removal and reinstallation
OYFH034205
OUM034012
OUM034013
■ Type B
■ Type A
Safety features of your vehicle
143
To remove the headrest:
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever or switch (1).
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go.
3. Press the headrest release button
(3) or press the release button with
slim tool (3) (for Type C and Type
D) while pulling the headrest up
(4).
WARNING
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
OUM034013L
OUMA036012
■ Type D
■ Type C
OUM034014
OUM034015
■ Type B
■ Type A
315
Safety features of your vehicle
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1) or pressing the release
button with slim tool (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
recline lever or switch (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s and
driver’s seatbacks.
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to
the head or neck, always make
sure the headrest is locked into
position and adjusted properly
after reinstalling.
OUM034015L
OUMA036015
■ Type D
■ Type C
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure vehicle occupants.
OUM034083L
Safety features of your vehicle
163
Rear seat adjustment
Forward and backward
(2nd row seat)
To move the seat forward or back-
ward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle (2nd row seat)
To recline the seatback:
1. Pull up the seatback recline lever
(for 2nd row outboard seat) or
strap (for 2nd row center or 3rd
row seat).
2. Hold the lever or strap and adjust
the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever or strap and
make sure the seatback is locked
in place. (The lever MUST return
to its original position for the seat-
back to lock.)
Walk-in seat (2nd row passenger
side, if equipped)
To get in or out of the 3rd row seat,
1. Route the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guide
clip. After inserting the seat belt,
tighten the belt webbing by pulling
it up.
2. Pull up the walk-in lever (1) on the
2nd row seatback.
OUM034076L
OUM034077L
OUM034022/H
OUM034023L
317
Safety features of your vehicle
3. Fold the 2nd row seatback and
push the seat to the farthest for-
ward position.
After getting in or out, slide the 2nd
row seat to the farthest rearward
position and pull the seatback firmly
backward until it clicks into place.
Make sure that the seat is locked in
place.
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
OUM034024L
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the 2nd
row seat while the vehicle is
moving or the seat is occupied
as the seat may suddenly move
and cause the passenger on the
seat to be injured.
WARNING
- Objects
Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward and
cause injury or damage during
sudden stops.
WARNING
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the vehicle is moving. This
is not a proper seating position
and no seat belts are available
for use.This could result in seri-
ous injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
Safety features of your vehicle
183
To fold down the rear seatback
1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seat-
back and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
Turn off the rear seat warmer (if
equipped) when you fold the 2nd
row seatback.
OUM034036/OUM034022
■ 2nd row seat
OUM034037/OUM034035
■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)
319
Safety features of your vehicle
4.Pull on the seatback folding lever
or strap, then fold the seat toward
the front of the vehicle. When you
return the seatback to its upright
position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pushing on
the top of the seatback.
5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback backward by pulling
on the folding lever or strap.
Pull the seatback firmly until it
clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked
in place.
6.Return the rear seat belt to the
proper position.
OUM034025L/OUM034026L
■ 2nd row seat
■ 3rd row seat (if equipped)
OUMA034027/OUMA034028
Safety features of your vehicle
203
2nd row seat folding
(from outside, if equipped)
Pull the 2nd row seat back folding
lever out.
The 2nd row seat back will be folded.
If you pull the left side lever (1) out,
left side seat back and center seat
back will be folded.
If you pull the right side lever (2) out,
right side seat back will be folded.
To fold down the rear center seat-
back (for 2nd row seat)
1. Lower the rear headrests to the
lowest position.
2. Push the center seatback folding
lever up, then fold the seat toward
the front of the vehicle.
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing
on the top of the seatback.
WARNING - Rear seat
folding
Do not fold the rear seats (2nd &
3rd row seats), if passengers,
pets or luggage are in the rear
seats.
It may cause injury or damage
to passengers, pets or luggage.
OUMA034030
OUM034031L
321
Safety features of your vehicle
Remember to return the rear shoulder
belts to their proper position. Routing
the seat belt webbing through the rear
seat belt guides will help keep the belts
from being trapped behind or under
the seats.
WARNING - 2nd row cen-
ter seat folding
• Do not fold the 2nd row center
seat, if there are occupants in
the 3rd row seats, as this may
result in injury to occupants if
the seat moves during a colli-
sion. If occupants in the 3rd
row seats, fix the 2nd row cen-
ter seat in its upright and
locked position.
• The 2nd row center seat back
does not lock into position
when it is folded toward the
front of the vehicle. If you use
the 2nd row center seat back
folding function to carry long
objects, you should fix the
long object to prevent it from
being thrown about the vehi-
cle in a collision and causing
injury to vehicle occupants.
CAUTION - Damaging
rear seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear (2nd
and/or 3rd row) seatback, insert
the buckle in the pocket between
the rear seatback and cushion.
Doing so can prevent the buckle
from being damaged by the rear
seatback.
WARNING - Cargo
Do not place objects in the rear
(2nd and/or 3rd row) seats,
since they cannot be properly
secured and may hit the front
seat occupants in a collision.
Cargo should always be
secured to prevent it from being
thrown around in the vehicle in
a collision causing injuries to
vehicle occupants.
OUN026140
WARNING - 3rd row seat
3rd row occupants should always
remain in the center of the seat
cushion so the occupants head
is protected by the headrest.
If not, the tailgate may hit the
occupant's head, which could
cause injury.
Safety features of your vehicle
223
Armrest (2nd row seat)
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
Headrest (for rear seat)
The rear seat(s) is equipped with
headrests in all the seating positions
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrests not only provide com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case of
an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the head-
rest is at the same height as the cen-
ter of gravity of an occupant's head.
Generally, the center of gravity of
most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
OUM034021L OHM038049N
* : if equipped
*
*
323
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
(for 2nd row seats)
To raise the headrest :
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest :
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support
2. Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
Removal and reinstallation
(for 2nd row seats)
OUMA034092
■ Outside
■ Center
OUM034019L
OUM034087L
OUMA034093
■ Outside
■ Center
Safety features of your vehicle
243
To remove the headrest :
1. Raise it as far as it can go then
press the release button (1) while
pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest :
1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (1).
2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.
3rd row headrest (if equipped)
The headrest will fold down automat-
ically when folding the seatback.
To fold the headrest manually :
Pull the strap.
To unfold the headrest :
Raise the headrest manually.
Always be sure the headrest has
locked into position after you return
the seatback.
WARNING
• Make sure the headrest locks
in position after adjusting it to
properly protect the occu-
pants.
• After installing the headrest,
make sure that it is installed
in the right direction.
A headrest installed reversely
could increase whiplash injury
during rear impact.
OUMA034091
OXM039061N
325
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
• For maximum restraint system pro-
tection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the front
of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section of
the belt across the abdominal area
must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
WARNING - Damaged
seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the web-
bing or hardware is damage as
you can no longer be sure that a
damage seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
WARNING - Twisted seat
belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted
seat belt may not properly pro-
tect you in an accident and
could even cut into your body.
WARNING - Shoulder Belt
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind
your back. An improperly
positioned shoulder belt can-
not protect the occupant in a
crash.
• Always wear both the shoul-
der portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
Safety features of your vehicle
263
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user which
will either prevent the seat belt
adjusting devices from operating to
remove slack, or prevent the seat
belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dan-
gerous and you may not be pro-
tected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the seat
belt repeatedly while driving. This
could result in loss of control, and
an accident causing death, serious
injury, or property damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are hard
or can break easily.
Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate according to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in "ON" position.
1GQA2083
WARNING - Seat belt
buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
327
Safety features of your vehicle
*
1
Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's
seat belt is buckled, the light will stop
within 6 seconds and chime will stop
immediately.
*
2
The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the
seat belt from the retractor, firmly
pull the belt out and release it. Then
you will be able to pull the belt out
smoothly.
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds None
3 mph~
6 mph
6 seconds
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds *
1
↓
Stop *
2
B180A01NF-1
B200A02NF
Safety features of your vehicle
283
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoul-
der belt anchor to one of the 3 posi-
tions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
near the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button
(2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat posi-
tions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recom-
mended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place any infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
OLM039026
Front seat
WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING - Seat belt
replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an acci-
dent could leave you with dam-
aged seat belts that will not pro-
vide protection in the event of
another collision.
329
Safety features of your vehicle
It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion
of the seat belt is adjusted manually
so that it fits snugly around your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
tem” in this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection
for seated passengers in either emer-
gency or automatic locking modes,
have the seated passengers use the
emergency locking feature for improv-
ed convenience. The automatic locking
function is intended to facilitate child
restraint installation. To convert from
the automatic locking feature to the
emergency locking operation mode,
allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully
retract.
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) on the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
CAUTION
Do NOT fold down the left por-
tion of the rear seat back when
the rear center seat belt is buck-
led. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the
rear center seat belt before fold-
ing down the left portion of the
rear seat back. If the rear center
seat belt is buckled when the
left portion of the rear seat back
is folded down, distortion and
damage to the top portion of the
seat back and seat belt garnish
may result, causing the seat
back to lock into the folded
down position.
B210A01NF-1
Safety features of your vehicle
303
Stowing the rear seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles can be
stowed in the pocket between the
rear seatback and cushion when not
in use.
Routing the seat belt webbing
through the rear seat belt guides will
help keep the belts from being
trapped behind or under the seats.
After inserting the seat belt, tighten
the belt webbing by pulling it up.
CAUTION - Seatbelt Guide
Remove the seat belt from the
guides before using. If you pull
on the seat belt when it is stored
in the guides, it may damage the
guides and/or belt webbing.
OUM034036
OUM034037
■ 2nd row seat
■ 3rd row seat
OUM034022
OUM034035
■ 2nd row seat
■ 3rd row seat
331
Safety features of your vehicle
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)).
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner
will activate and pull the seat belt into
tighter contact against the occu-
pant's body.
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal colli-
sions.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-
tem activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
OXMA033101
Safety features of your vehicle
323
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration:
(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
(3) SRS control module
(4) Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
✽✽
NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
tem may be activated not only in
certain frontal collision but also in
certain side collisions or rollovers,
if the vehicle is equipped with a
side or curtain air bag.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
ODMESA2024
WARNING - Skin Irritation
Wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly after an accident in
which the pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated. The fine
dust from the pre-tensioner
activation may cause skin irrita-
tion and should not be breathed
for prolonged periods.
333
Safety features of your vehicle
If the pre-tensioner seat belt system
are not working properly, this warning
light will illuminate even if there is not
a malfunction with the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it remains
illuminated after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds, or if it illu-
minates while the vehicle is being
driven, have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt
and SRS air bag system as soon as
possible.
Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-
ate only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be
replaced. If the pre-tensioner must
be replaced, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint
laws. You should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state.
Child and/or infant seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. For more information
about the use of these restraints,
refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when
properly restrained in the rear seat by
a child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buy-
ing any child restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that
it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213. The restraint must be
appropriate for your child's height
and weight. Check the label on the
child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in
this section.
WARNING - Hot preten-
sioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt mechanism
fires during a collision the pre-
tensioner becomes hot and can
burn you.
Safety features of your vehicle
343
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always
occupy the rear seat and use the
available lap/shoulder belts. The lap
portion should be fastened and
snugged on the hips and as low as
possible. Check if the belt fits period-
ically. A child's squirming could put
the belt out of position. Children are
given the most safety in the event of
an accident when they are restrained
by a proper restraint system in the
rear seat. If a larger child (over age
12) must be seated in the front seat,
the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
der belt and the seat should be
placed in the rearmost position.
Children age 12 and under should be
restrained securely in the rear seat.
NEVER place a child age 12 and
under in the front seat. NEVER place
a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.
WARNING - Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint sys-
tem. If the shoulder belt comes
in contact with your child's neck
or face your child is too small to
ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
seat belt will inflict injury to your
child's neck, throat and face.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
335
Safety features of your vehicle
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in
the event of an accident and to
achieve maximum effectiveness of
the restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the vehicle is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front and rear
seats are in a reclined position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident. This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt oper-
ation should be directed to an
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Pinched seat
belt
Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
seatback to its upright position.
A caught or pinched webbing/
buckle may become damaged
and could fail during a collision
or sudden stop.
Safety features of your vehicle
363
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the vehicle should
sit in the rear seat and must always
be properly restrained to minimize
the risk of injury in an accident, sud-
den stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Larger children not in
a child restraint should use one of
the seat belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt,
or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH
anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat
belts, and fits your child.
Follow all the instructions provided
by the manufacturer when installing
the child restraint system.
When the child restraint system is
not in use, store it in the luggage
area or fasten it with a seat belt so
that it will not be thrown forward in
case of a sudden stop or an acci-
dent.
WARNING - Restraint
location
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat. A child riding in the front
passenger seat can be forceful-
ly struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING - Hot child
restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
337
Safety features of your vehicle
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required.The child seat or infant seat
should be of appropriate size for the
child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
WARNING - Holding chil-
dren
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
WARNING - Unattended
Children
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle. The car can heat up
very quickly, resulting in serious
bodily injury or death to the child
in the vehicle.
WARNING - Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
CRS09
OUN026150
Forward-facing child restraint system
Rearward-facing child restraint system
Safety features of your vehicle
383
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat,
because of the danger an inflating
passenger-side air bag could impact
the rear-facing child restraint and kill
the child.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency lock
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the auto lock
mode to secure a child restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this section, have the
system checked immediately by your
authorized Kia dealer.
Placing a passenger seat belt
into the auto lock mode
The auto lock mode will help prevent
the normal movement of the child in
the vehicle from causing the seat belt
to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following
procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoul-
der belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
E2MS103005
OEN036101
339
Safety features of your vehicle
If the vehicle headrest prevents prop-
er installation of a child seat (as
described in the child seat system
manual), the headrest of the respec-
tive seating position shall be read-
justed or entirely removed.
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-
ing” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock”
mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
OEN036103OEN036102
Safety features of your vehicle
403
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you can-
not, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully. Therefore, the preced-
ing seven steps must be followed
each time a child restraint is installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Auto Lock” mode
to the emergency lock mode for
normal adult usage.
OEN036104
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system. If the
retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking mode, the child
restraint can move when your
vehicle turns or stops suddenly.
341
Safety features of your vehicle
Securing a child restraint seat
with tether anchor system
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the back of the rear cush-
ions.
1.Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rests, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback. In case of interference
between the child restraint seat
and the headrest remove the par-
ticular head restraint for better fit-
ment of the child restraint seat.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.
Check that the child restraint system
is secure by pushing and pulling it in
different directions. Incorrectly fitted
child restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or serious
injury.
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break.
OUM034039L
OUM034038
■ 2nd row seat
Safety features of your vehicle
423
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-
patible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mount-
ed attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located
on the left and right 2nd row seat
backs to indicate the position of the
lower anchors for child restraints.
Install the child restraint seat fully
rearward against the seatback with
the seatback reclined two positions
from the most upright latched posi-
tion.
WARNING - Unused rear
seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure to
do so may result in child stran-
gulation.
OXM039035
OUM034078L
Lower Anchor
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
343
Safety features of your vehicle
LATCH anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors
are located in the left and right out-
board rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustra-
tion. There is no LATCH anchor pro-
vided for the center rear seating
position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the 2nd row seat left and
right outboard seating positions.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt
the seat from side to side. Also try to
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
✽✽
NOTICE
The recommended weight for the
LATCH system is under 65 lb (30
kg).
How to calculate the child restraint
weight :
Child restraint weight =
65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight
WARNING - LATCH lower
anchors
Never attempt to attach a
LATCH equipped seat in the
center seating position. LATCH
lower anchors are only to be
used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions.You
may damage the anchors or the
anchors may fail and break in a
collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
443
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OXMA032101
345
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate?
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START position.
• The appropriate air bags inflate
instantly in the event of a serious
frontal collision or side collision in
order to help protect the occupants
from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehi-
cles or objects which your vehicle
hits in the collision. The determin-
ing factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in serious
side collisions, side and/or curtain
air bags will inflate if the sensing
system detects a rollover.
• When a rollover is detected, side
and/or curtain air bags will remain
inflated longer to help provide pro-
tection from ejection, especially
when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.
• In order to help provide protection,
the air bags must inflate rapidly.
The speed of the air bag inflation is
a consequence of extremely short
time in which to inflate the air bag
between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occu-
pant impacts those structures. This
speed of inflation reduces the risk
of serious or life-threatening
injuries and is thus a necessary
part of the air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel or passenger air
bag can cause fatal injuries,
especially if the occupant is
positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel or passenger
air bag.
Safety features of your vehicle
463
Noise and smoke
When inflated, the air bags make a
loud noise and leave smoke and
powder in the air inside the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the
ignition of the air bag inflator. After
the air bag inflates, you may feel sub-
stantial discomfort in breathing due
to the contact of your chest with both
the seat belt and the air bag, as well
as from breathing the smoke and
powder. Open your doors and/or
windows as soon as possible after
impact in order to reduce discom-
fort and prevent prolonged expo-
sure to the smoke and powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
WARNING - Hot compo-
nents
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after airbag infla-
tion.The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
WARNING - Airbag infla-
tion
Sit as far back as possible from
the steering wheel while still
maintaining comfortable con-
trol of your vehicle. A distance
of at least 10" from your chest
to the steering wheel is recom-
mended. Failure to do so can
result in airbag inflation injuries
to the driver.
347
Safety features of your vehicle
Do not install a child restraint on
the front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraints in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it could cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
Air bag warning light
The purpose of air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag system, which could include
your side and/or curtain air bags
used for rollover protection.
1JBH3051
W7-147
WARNING - Air bag
deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could impact the
child.
Safety features of your vehicle
483
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
(1) Driver's front air bag module
(2) Passenger's front air bag module
(3) Side air bag modules
(4) Curtain air bag modules
(5) Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
(6) Air bag warning light
(7) SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
(8) Front impact sensors
(9) Side impact sensors
(10) PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s
seat only)
(11) Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
(12) Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
(13) Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
If the air bag warning light is illumi-
nated for more than 6 seconds after
the ignition is turned on, or of it illu-
minates during vehicle operation, an
SRS component may not be func-
tioning properly and you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
W7-147
OXM033200L
349
Safety features of your vehicle
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
in the air bag system. Have an
authorized Kia dealer inspect the air
bag system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
The front air bag modules are locat-
ed both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
B240B01L
Driver’s front air bag (1)
B240B02L
Driver’s front air bag (2)
Safety features of your vehicle
503
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility
and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
• If an air bag deploys, there may be
a loud noise followed by a fine dust
released in the vehicle. These con-
ditions are normal and are not haz-
ardous - the air bags are packed in
this fine powder. The dust generat-
ed during air bag deployment may
cause skin or eye irritation as well
as aggravate asthma for some per-
sons. Always wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly with luke-
warm water and a mild soap after
an accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
B240B03L
Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B05L
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING - Air bag
obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehi-
cle. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles if the air
bag deploys.
WARNING - Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
351
Safety features of your vehicle
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS air bag warning
light does not illuminate, or contin-
uously remains on after illuminat-
ing for about 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, or after the engine is
started, comes on while driving,
the SRS is not working properly. If
this occurs, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the ignition switch.
Never remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Failure
to heed this warning will cause the
SRS air bag warning light to illumi-
nate.
Occupant Detection System
(ODS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. Only the front passenger front
air bag is controlled by the Occupant
Detection System.
Do not put anything in front of the
passenger air bag indicator.
OUMA034090
Safety features of your vehicle
523
Main components of the occu-
pant detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• An electronic system which deter-
mines whether the passenger air
bag systems should be activated
or deactivated.
• A indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied by a person that the system
determines to be of appropriate size,
and he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an
upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with their seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and their
feet on the floor), the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will turn off
and the front passenger's air bag will
be able to inflate, if necessary, in
frontal crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained
properly (sitting upright with the seat in
an upright position, centered on the
seat cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended, feet on the
floor, and wearing the safety belt prop-
erly) for the most effective protection
by the air bag and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-
tion.
(2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
353
Safety features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blan-
ket, front seat cover or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection
system
*
1
: The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the
air bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS,
thus allowing the air bag to deploy.To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat.
*
2
: Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
Condition detected by the
occupant detection
system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
"PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF"
indicator light
SRS warning
light
Front passenger
air bag
1. Adult or child*
1
Off Off Activated
2. Child restraint system*
2
On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. There is a malfunction
in the system
Off On Activated
WARNING - ODS System
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the Occupant
Detection System and may
result in the deactivation of the
front passenger airbag. It is
important for the driver to
instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as
contained in this manual.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
543
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
1KMN3665
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the door or cen-
ter console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
OVQ036013N
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load or an
active electronic device on
the front passenger seat or
seatback pocket.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
OVQ036014N
- Never place feet on the front
passenger seatback.
(Continued)
355
Safety features of your vehicle
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
✽✽
NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occu-
pant detection sensor will then clas-
sify the front passenger after several
more seconds.
B990A01O
Proper position
WARNING - “AIR BAG
OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated, because
the air bag will not deploy in the
event of a crash. The driver
must instruct the passenger to
reposition himself in the seat.
Failure to properly position
yourself may lead to air bag
deactivation resulting in air bag
non-deployment in a collision. If
the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator remains illumi-
nated after the passenger repo-
sitions themselves properly and
the car is restarted, it is recom-
mended that passenger move to
the rear seat because the pas-
senger's front air bag will not
deploy.
Safety features of your vehicle
563
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant detec-
tion system, never install a child
restraint system in the front pas-
senger's seat. A deploying air bag
can forcefully strike a child result-
ing in serious injuries or death. Any
child age 12 and under should ride
in the rear seat. Children too large
for child restraints should use the
available lap/shoulder belts. No
matter what type of crash, children
of all ages are safer when
restrained in the rear seat.
• If the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator is illuminated when
the front passenger's seat is occu-
pied by an adult and he/she sits
properly (sitting upright with the
seatback in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the
floor), have that person sit in the
rear seat.
Any child age 12 and under should
ride in the rear seat. Children too
large for child restraints should use
the available lap/shoulder belts. No
matter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained in
the rear seat.
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air
bag warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate because the
passenger's front air bag is connect-
ed with the occupant detection sys-
tem. If there is a malfunction of the
occupant detection system, the PAS-
SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
will not illuminate and the passen-
ger's front air bag will inflate in frontal
impact crashes even if there is no
occupant in the front passenger's
seat.
WARNING - Replacement
/ modifications
The front passenger seat, dash-
board or door should not be
replaced except by an authorized
Kia dealer using original Kia parts
designed for this vehicle and
model. Any other such replace-
ment or modification could
adversely affect the operation of
the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.
357
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passen-
ger seating position.
The indication of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "AIR BAG" locat-
ed on the air bag pad cover on the
steering wheel and the passenger's
side front panel pad above the glove
box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's and front passenger's
seat belt usage and impact severity.
The seat belt buckle sensors deter-
mine if the driver and front passen-
ger's seat belts are fastened.
These sensors provide the ability to
control the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fas-
tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instru-
ment panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity and
seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS
Control Module) controls the air bag
inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
OUM034042
■ Driver’s front air bag
■ Passenger’s front air bag
OUMA034041
Safety features of your vehicle
583
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat.The occu-
pant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under cer-
tain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
chapter.
Modification to the seat structure can
cause the air bag to deploy at a dif-
ferent level than should be provided.
Manufacturers are required by gov-
ernment regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifica-
tions to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system. That contact is Kia’s toll-free
Customer Assistance center at 1-
800-333-4Kia. However, Kia does
not endorse nor will it support any
changes to any part or structure of
the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including
the occupant detection system.
✽✽
NOTICE
The front passenger seat, dashboard
or door should not be replaced
except by an authorized Kia dealer
using original Kia parts designed for
this vehicle and model. Any other
such replacement or modification
could adversely affect the operation
of the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.
Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to help
provide enhanced occupant protec-
tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags
are not intended to deploy in colli-
sions in which sufficient protection
can be provided by the pre-tensioner
seat belt.
359
Safety features of your vehicle
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. However, when
frontal deployment threshold is satis-
fied at side-impact, front air bags
may deploy. In addition, front air bags
will not deploy in frontal crashes
below the deployment threshold.
Side air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front seat. The pur-
pose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front pas-
senger with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt alone.
• The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact. However, when side deploy-
ment threshold is satisfied at front-
impact, side air bags may deploy.
• The side air bags may deploy on
the side of the impact or on both
sides.
• The side and/or curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle will deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
• The side air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or
rollover situations.
OUM034044
OUMA034095
WARNING - Unexpected
deployment
Avoid impact to the side impact
airbag sensor when the ignition
switch is ON to prevent unex-
pected deployment of the side
air bag.
WARNING - SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
Safety features of your vehicle
603
• The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's
seat belt systems and is not a sub-
stitute for them. Therefore your
seat belts must be worn at all times
while the vehicle is in operation.
• For best protection from the side
air bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air
bag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position
with the seat belt properly fas-
tened. The driver's hands should
be placed on the steering wheel at
the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The
passenger's arms and hands
should be placed on their laps.
• If seat or seat cover is damaged,
have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia deal-
er. Inform the dealer that your vehi-
cle is equipped with side air bags
and an occupant detection system.
WARNING - Flying
objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side
airbag inflates.
WARNING - Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side air bag as
this may affect the deployment
of the side air bags.
361
Safety features of your vehicle
Curtain air bag
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
occupants in certain side impacts
and to help prevent them from eject-
ing out of the vehicle as a result of a
rollover, especially when the seat-
belts are also in use.
• The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and point of
impact. However, when side deploy-
ment threshold is satisfied at front-
impact, side air bags may deploy.
• The curtain air bags may deploy on
the side of the impact or on both
sides.
• Also, the curtain air bags on both
sides of the vehicle will deploy in
certain rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side
impact or rollover situations.
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies against the
doors, put their arms on the doors,
stretch their arms out of the window
or place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are seat-
ed on seats equipped with side
impact and/or curtain air bags.
✽✽
NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any com-
ponents of the side and curtain air
bag system. This should only be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
OUM034045
OUM034046
Safety features of your vehicle
623
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-infla-
tion conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module/
Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
(4) Side pressure sensor
OUMA034047/OUM034048/OUMA034049/OUM034050/OUM034051
363
Safety features of your vehicle
Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed due
to the deformation of the front
bumper, front end module, body or
front doors where side collision sen-
sors are installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Installing bumper guards (or side
step or running board) or replacing a
bumper (or front door module) with
non-genuine parts may adversely
affect your vehicle’s collision and air
bag deployment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
OUM034052
WARNING - Air bag sen-
sors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bags or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
643
Side and/or curtain air bags
Side and/or curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.
Also, the side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when a rollover is
detected by a rollover sensor.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. sides
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact colli-
sions.They may inflate in other types
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors. Side air bag
and/or curtain air bags may also
inflate where rollover sensors indi-
cate the possibility of a rollover
occurring (even if none actually
occurs) or in other situations, includ-
ing when the vehicle is tilted while
being towed. Even where side and/or
curtain air bags would not provide
impact protection in a rollover, how-
ever, they will deploy to prevent ejec-
tion of occupants, especially those
who are restrained with seat belts.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.
OUM034053
OUM034054
365
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
OUM034055
OUM034057OUM034056
Safety features of your vehicle
663
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in
a direction where the air bags
would not be able to provide any
additional benefit, and thus the
sensors may not deploy any air
bags.
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
reduced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Front air bags may not inflate in all
rollover accidents where the
SRSCM indicates that the front air
bag deployment would not provide
additional occupant protection.
1VQA2089 OUM034058 OUM034059
367
Safety features of your vehicle
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sen-
sors.
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and so there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate, or continuously remains on, have
your vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized Kia dealer. Improper
handling of the SRS system may
result in serious personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one which
has been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized Kia dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to fol-
low these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
OUM034060
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by chang-
ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
tem, front end or side sheet metal or
ride height, this may affect the opera-
tion of your vehicle's air bag system.
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required
by the U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
attached to the sunvisor to alert the
driver and passengers of potential
risks of the air bag system.
WARNING - Tampering
with SRS
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in the
accidental inflation of the air
bags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
WARNING - Towing Vehicle
Always have the ignition off
when your vehicle is being
towed. The side air bags may
inflate if the vehicle is tilted
such as when being towed
because of the rollover sensors
in the vehicle.
OUMA034094
OUMA034061
368
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Folding key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
• Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
• Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-21
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-22
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
• Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Liftgate (for manual liftgate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Opening the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Closing the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
• Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
• Opening the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
• Closing the liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
• Smart power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
• Emergency liftgate safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
• Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
• Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
• Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
• Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Electric power steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
• Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
• Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
• Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
• Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
• Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
• LCD display control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
• Transaxle shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
• Icy Road Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
• LCD modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Trip modes (trip computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
• Trip Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
• Digital speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
• One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
• Turn by turn mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
• ASCC/LDWS mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
• A/V mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
• Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
• User settings mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
• Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Operation of the rear parking assist system. . . . . . 4-108
• Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Rear parking assist system precautions . . . . . . . . . 4-110
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Surround view monitoring system (SVM) . . . . . 4-113
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
• High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
• Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
• Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Check headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
• Headlight leveling device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
• AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) . . . . . . . . 4-118
4
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Rear window wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Windshield wiper/washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
• Front windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
• Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
• Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
• Luggage lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
• Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Headlight (headlamp) escort function. . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
• Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
• 3rd row air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Air conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
• Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-141
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• 3
rd
row air conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
• Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-151
• Air conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-153
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
Clean air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• Luggage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
• Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
• Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
4
• Seat cooler (air ventilation seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
• AC inverter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
• USB charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
• Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
• Floor mat anchor (s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
• Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
• Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
Exterior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
• Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
• Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
• Steering wheel remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
• Aux, USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
• How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
• Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
• Using iPod
®
device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
4
45
Features of your vehicle
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe
place.(not in the vehicle)
Key operations
• Used to start the engine.
• Used to lock and unlock the doors.
• Used to lock and unlock the glove
box.
• To unfold the key, press the release
button then the key will unfold auto-
matically. To fold the key, fold the
key manually while pressing the
release button.
FOLDING KEY
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without
pressing the release button.
This may damage the key.
WARNING - Aftermarket
key
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used,
the ignition switch may not
return to ON after START. If this
happens, the starter will contin-
ue to operate causing damage
to the starter motor and possi-
ble fire due to excessive current
in the wiring.
OUM045429MX
Features of your vehicle
64
Door Lock (1)
1. Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
2. Press the lock button(1).
3. All doors and liftgate will lock. The
hazard warning lights will blink
once.
4. If the lock button is pressed once
more within 4 seconds, the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
horn will sound once.
5. Make sure that doors are locked by
checking the door lock button inside
or pulling the outside door handle.
Door Unlock (2)
1. Press the unlock button(2).
2. The driver's door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
liftgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
WARNING - Ignition key
(smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a man-
ual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
OXMA043317
47
Features of your vehicle
Liftgate unlock (3)
The liftgate is unlocked if the button
is pressed for more than 1 second.
Also, once the liftgate is opened and
then closed, the liftgate will be locked
automatically.
• For Power Liftgate Only:
The Power Liftgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the liftgate is
opened and then closed, the liftgate
will be locked again automatically.
If the power liftgate is switched ‘Off’
using the button in the overhead con-
sole, the liftgate unlock button will
operate to unlock the liftgate as
described above.
For detailed information refer to the
"Power liftgate" in this chapter.
Panic (4)
The horn sounds and hazard warn-
ing lights flash for about 27 seconds
if this button is pressed for more than
0.5 second. To stop the horn and
lights, press any button on the trans-
mitter.
Transmitter precautions
• The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
- The ignition key is in the ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating dis-
tance limit (about 30 feet [10 m]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sub-
station or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation of
the transmitter.
Features of your vehicle
84
• When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, con-
tact an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proxim-
ity to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phones normal operational signals.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
and receiving calls, text messag-
ing, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the transmit-
ter and your mobile phone in the
same pants or jacket pocket and
always try to maintain an adequate
distance between the two devices.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Battery replacement
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium
battery which will normally last for
several years. When replacement is
necessary, use the following proce-
dure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is positioned correctly.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
OYDDCO2005
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
49
Features of your vehicle
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized Kia dealer for transmitter
reprogramming.
• The transmitter is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If you
are unsure how to use your trans-
mitter or replace the battery, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
may cause harm to human
health. Dispose of the bat-
tery according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
Immobilizer system
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you insert your ignition key into
the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
the system verifies if the ignition key
is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
To activate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-
tion. The immobilizer system acti-
vates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys anywhere
in your vehicle.Your Immobilizer pass-
word is a customer unique password
and should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere in
your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
CAUTION - Transmitter
damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmit-
ter to heat or sunlight.
Features of your vehicle
104
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽✽
NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not approved by
the party responsible for compli-
ance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec-
tricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
411
Features of your vehicle
Record your key number
The key code number
is stamped on the bar
code tag attached to
the key set. Should
you lose your keys,
this number will enable an author-
ized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys
easily. Remove the bar code tag and
store it in a safe place. Also, record
the code number and keep it in a
safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
Smart key function
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key (2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
With a smart key, you can lock or
unlock a door (and Liftgate) and start
the engine.
Refer to the following for more details.
SMART KEY
OUM045428MX
WARNING - Ignition key
(smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a man-
ual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition switch or
press the start button. The key
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or death.
Features of your vehicle
124
Door Lock
Using the door handle button
- Carry the smart key.
- Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
- Press the button of the outside door
handle.
- The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
- Make sure that doors are locked by
pulling the outside door handle.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40in.
(0.7~1m) from the outside door
handle.
• Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will
not lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds if any of following
occur:
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
- The engine start/stop button is
in ACC or ON position.
- Any door except the liftgate is
open.
Using the button on the smart key
- Close all doors, engine hood and
liftgate.
- Press the lock button(1).
- The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once.
- Make sure that doors are locked by
pulling the outside door handle.
OYDDCO2004
OUM044001
413
Features of your vehicle
Unlocking
Using the door handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the button of the driver's
outside door handle.
3. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
4. Press the button twice within 4
seconds and all doors and the lift-
gate will unlock and the hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40in.
(0.7~1m) from the outside door
handle.
• When the smart key is recognized in
the area of 28~40in. (0.7~1m) from
the front outside door handle, other
people can also open the doors.
• After unlocking the driver’s door
or all doors, the door(s) will lock
automatically unless the door is
opened.
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the unlock button(2) of the
smart key.
2. The driver’s door will unlock. The
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound two times.
3. Press the unlock button(2) twice
within 4 seconds and all doors and
the liftgate will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink and the
chime will sound two times.
✽✽
NOTICE
After pressing the button, the doors
will lock automatically unless any
door is opened within 30 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can activate or deactivate the
Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to
"User settings" in this chapter.
Liftgate unlocking
Using the liftgate handle button
1. Carry the smart key.
2. Press the liftgate handle button.
3. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
Once the liftgate is opened and
then closed, the liftgate will lock
automatically.
✽✽
NOTICE
The button will only operate when
the smart key is within 28~40in.
(0.7~1m) from the liftgate handle.
Features of your vehicle
144
Using the button on the smart key
1. Press the liftgate unlock button (3)
for more than 1 second.
2. When all doors are locked, the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
• For Power Liftgate Only:
The Power Liftgate will open if the
button is pressed for more than 1
second. Also, once the liftgate is
opened and then closed, the liftgate
will be locked again automatically.
For detailed information refer to the
"Power liftgate" in this chapter.
Panic
1. Press the panic button (4) for more
than 1 second.
2.The horn sounds and hazard
warning light flash for about 27
seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
To stop the horn and lights, press
any button on the smart key.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to the “Engine start/stop
button” in chapter 5.
415
Features of your vehicle
Loss of the smart key
A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle.
If you happen to lose your smart key,
you will not be able to start the
engine. You should immediately take
the vehicle and remaining key to your
authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehi-
cle, if necessary) to protect it from
potential theft.
Smart key precautions
• The smart key will not work if any
of the following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key and contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the smart key could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
a call, receiving calls, text messag-
ing, and/or sending/receiving
emails. Avoid placing the smart key
and your cell phone or smart phone
in the same pants or jacket pocket
and maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
CAUTION - Transmitter
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
Features of your vehicle
164
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for
several years, but if the smart key is
not working properly, try replacing
the battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use your smart key or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
1. Remove the mechanical key.
2. Pry open the rear cover.
3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
is in the correct position.
4. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
• The smart key is designed to give
you years of trouble-free use, how-
ever it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use or
replace the battery, contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause
the smart key to malfunction. Be
sure to use the correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the smart key,
don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it
to heat or sunlight.
• An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be harm-
ful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
Smart key immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
smart key and electronic devices
inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, when-
ever you turn the engine start/stop
button to the ON position by pressing
the button while carrying the smart
key, it verifies if the smart key is valid
or not.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
CAUTION - Smart key
damage
Do not drop, get wet or expose
the smart key to heat or sun-
light, or it will be damaged.
OUM045427MX
417
Features of your vehicle
To deactivate the immobilizer
system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the ON position by pressing the but-
ton while carrying the smart key.
In order to prevent theft of your vehi-
cle, do not leave spare keys any-
where in your vehicle.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the engine start/stop button to
the OFF position. The immobilizer
system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
✽✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separate in
order to avoid a starting malfunction.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽✽
NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance, it will not be cov-
ered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
Features of your vehicle
184
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is oper-
ated in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered,
the system provides an audible
alarm with blinking of the hazard
warning lights.
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1. Remove the ignition key from the
ignition switch and exit the vehicle.
2. Make sure that all doors (and lift-
gate) and engine hood are closed
and latched.
3. Lock the doors using the transmit-
ter of the keyless entry system (or
smart key) or ignition key.
After completion of the steps above,
the hazard warning lights will blink
(for smart key, the chime also
sounds) once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door (or liftgate) or engine
hood remains open, the hazard
warning lights and the chime will not
operate and the theft-alarm will not
arm. If all doors and liftgate and
engine hood are closed after the lock
button is pressed, the hazard warn-
ing lights blink once.
The system can also be armed by
locking the doors with the key from
the front doors; however, the hazard
warning lights will not blink using this
method.
✽✽
NOTICE
The theft-alarm system can be deac-
tivated by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
419
Features of your vehicle
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a pas-
senger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s) leave
the vehicle. If any door (or liftgate
) or engine hood is opened within
30 seconds after the system
enters the armed stage, the sys-
tem is disarmed to prevent an
unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened with-
out using the ignition key or trans-
mitter (or smart key).
• The liftgate is opened without using
the transmitter (or smart key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 27 seconds, and
repeat the horn 3 times unless the
system is disarmed. To turn off the
system, unlock the doors with the igni-
tion key or transmitter (or smart key).
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when
• The doors (and liftgate) are
unlocked with the transmitter (or
smart key) or the ignition key.
After depressing the unlock button,
the hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound twice (in
smart key) to indicate that the sys-
tem is disarmed.
After depressing the unlock button, if
any door (or liftgate) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
Features of your vehicle
204
✽✽
NOTICE
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
- If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key
into the ignition switch, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position
and wait for 30 seconds. Then the
system will be disarmed.
- If the system is not disarmed with
the smart key, press the engine
start/stop button with smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifi-
cations to the theft-alarm system are
not covered by your vehicle manu-
facturer warranty.
CAUTION - Adjusting
alarm system
Do not change, alter or adjust
the theft-alarm system because
it could cause the theft-alarm
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
421
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
• Turn the key counterclockwise to
lock and clockwise to unlock.
• If you lock the driver’s door with a
key, all vehicle doors will lock auto-
matically.
• From the driver’s door, turn the key
to the right once to unlock the door
and once more within 4 seconds to
unlock all doors.
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely.
✽✽
NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
• To lock a door without the key, push
the inside door lock button (1) or cen-
tral door lock switch (2) to the “Lock”
position when the ignition switch is
OFF position and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle
doors will lock automatically.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
OUM044002
UnlockLock Unlock
■ Type A ■ Type B
Lock
OUM044003
Features of your vehicle
224
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion.The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the dri-
ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button will
unlock and the door will open. (if
equipped)
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened.
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from out-
side.
• Move to the cargo area and open
the liftgate.
OUM044004
423
Features of your vehicle
With central door lock switch
Operate by pressing the central door
lock switch.
• When pressing the front portion (1)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
lock.
• When pressing the rear portion (2)
of the switch, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch
and any front door is opened, the
doors will not lock even though the
front portion (1) of the central door
lock switch is pressed.
Impact sensing door unlock
system
In the event of air bag deployment
resulting from a vehicle impact, all
doors will automatically unlock.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can select some auto door
lock/unlock features in “User Settings”
For more information, refer to
“User Settings” in this chapter.
OUM044005
Driver’s door
OUM034082L
Passenger’s door
WARNING - Doors
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while the
vehicle is in motion to prevent
accidental opening of the door.
WARNING - Unattended
children/animals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle
Features of your vehicle
244
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Turn the child safety lock (1) locat-
ed on the rear edge of the door to
the lock ( ) position. When the
child safety lock is in the lock posi-
tion, the rear door will not open
even when the inner door handle
is pulled.
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle until
the rear door child safety lock is
unlocked.
OUM044006
WARNING - Rear door
locks
Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
vehicle. If a child accidently
opens the rear doors while the
vehicle is moving, they may fall
out.
425
Features of your vehicle
Opening the liftgate
• The liftgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter
(or smart key) or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the liftgate can be
opened by pressing the handle
switch and then pulling the handle
up.
• Only the liftgate is unlocked if the
liftgate unlock button on the smart
key is pressed (if equipped). Once
the liftgate is opened and then
closed, the liftgate is locked auto-
matically.
The liftgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the liftgate.
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
Closing the liftgate
To close the liftgate, lower and push
down the liftgate firmly. Make sure
that the liftgate is securely latched.
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the liftgate.
LIFTGATE (for manual liftgate)
CAUTION - Liftgate lift
Make certain that you close the
liftgate before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
to the liftgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the liftgate
is not closed prior to driving.
OUMA044007 OUMA045008MX
Features of your vehicle
264
Emergency liftgate safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency liftgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the lift-
gate. When someone is inadvertent-
ly locked in the cargo area, the lift-
gate can be opened by pushing the
release lever and pushing open the
liftgate.
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available.
Occupants should always be
properly restrained.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
Driving with the liftgate open is
not advisable. Dangerous
exhaust fumes can enter the
passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the liftgate
opened, keep the air vents and
all windows open so that addi-
tional outside air can enter.
WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the cargo area of the
vehicle at any time. The cargo
area is a very dangerous loca-
tion in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
OUMA044009
427
Features of your vehicle
POWER LIFTGATE
(1) Power liftgate open / close button
(2) Power liftgate handle switch
(3) Power liftgate close button
✽✽
NOTICE
If IGN is ON, the power liftgate
operates when :
• Automatic shift lever is in P (Park).
• Manual shift lever is in N (Neutral).
✽✽
NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power lift-
gate may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not attach heavy objects to the
power liftgate when you operate the
power liftgate. Additional weight on
liftgate could cause damage to the
system.
WARNING - Unattended
children/pets
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might oper-
ate the power liftgate in such a
way that could result in injury to
themselves or others or dam-
age to the vehicle.
OUMA044010
OUMA044011
OUM044012L
Features of your vehicle
284
Opening the liftgate
The power liftgate will open automat-
ically by doing one of the following:
• Press and hold the liftgate unlock
button on the transmitter or smart
key until power liftgate operates.
• While power liftgate operating, you
can stop it if you shortly press the
unlock button on the transmitter or
smart key.
CAUTION
Do not close or open the power
liftgate manually during auto-
matic operation.This may cause
damage to the power liftgate or
to the vehicle.
If it is necessary to close or
open the power liftgate manual-
ly when the battery is dis-
charged or disconnected, make
sure the liftgate is not in opera-
tion. Switch the power liftgate to
the off position. Do not apply
excessive force.
OUM044300L
WARNING
Make sure that there are no peo-
ple or objects in the path of the
power liftgate (or smart power
liftgate) prior to use. Serious
injury, damage to the vehicle or
damage to surrounding objects
may result if contact with the
power liftgate (or smart power
liftgate) occurs.
OUMA044014
429
Features of your vehicle
• Press the power liftgate open/close
button for approximately one sec-
ond.
• For emergency stop while power
liftgate operating, press the power
liftgate open/close button shortly.
• Press the liftgate handle switch
carrying the smart key with you.
Closing the liftgate
• Press the power liftgate close but-
ton for approximately one second
when the liftgate is opened.
The liftgate will close and lock
automatically.
OUMA044010
OUMA044011
OUMA044010
OUM044300L
Features of your vehicle
304
• For emergency stop while power
liftgate operating, press the power
liftgate open/close button shortly.
Power liftgate non-opening condi-
tions
The power liftgate will not open auto-
matically, when the vehicle is moving
more than 2mph (3km/h) or the auto-
matic shift lever is not in P(Park) posi-
tion. The power liftgate will not open
automatically, when the automatic
shift lever is not in P(Park) position or
the manual shift lever is not in
N(Neutral) position.
✽✽
NOTICE
The chime will sound continuously if
you drive over 2mph (3km/h) with the
liftgate opened. Stop your vehicle at a
safe place as soon as possible to check
if your liftgate is opened.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The power liftgate can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However the power liftgate opera-
tion consumes large amounts of
vehicle electric power. To prevent
the battery from being discharged,
do not operate it excessively.
• To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the power
liftgate in the open position for a
long time.
• Do not modify or repair any part
of the power liftgate by yourself.
This must be done by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
do not operate the power liftgate.
This could cause the power liftgate
to operate improperly.
(Continued)
CAUTION
Do not operate the power lift-
gate more than 5 times continu-
ously.
It may damage the power liftgate
system. If you operate the power
liftgate more than 5 times con-
tinuously, the chime will sound 3
times and the power liftgate will
not operate. At this time, stop
operating the liftgate and leave it
for more than 1 minute.
431
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• In cold and wet climates, the
power liftgate may not work prop-
erly due to freezing conditions.
• It is recommended to wait until
the power liftgate is fully closed
before starting the vehicle. The
power liftgate may not close fully
if the vehicle is started during
automatic closing.
Automatic reversal
During power opening and closing if
the power liftgate is blocked by an
object or part of the body, the power
liftgate will detect the resistance.
• If the resistance is detected while
opening the liftgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
• If the resistance is detected while
closing the liftgate, it will stop and
move in the opposite direction.
However, if the resistance is weak
such as from an object that is thin or
soft, or the liftgate is near the latched
position, the automatic stop and
reversal may not detect the resist-
ance.
If the automatic reversal feature
operates continuously more than
twice during opening or closing oper-
ation, the power liftgate may stop at
that position. At this time, close the
liftgate manually and operate the lift-
gate automatically again.
WARNING
Never place any object or part
of your body in the path of the
power liftgate as it is operating.
Doing so could result in person-
al injury.
OUMA044013
CAUTION
Never operate the power lift
gate with any heavy objects
attached (e.g. bicycles) as it
could become damaged.
Features of your vehicle
324
How to reset the power liftgate
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the related fuse has
been replaced or disconnected, for the
power liftgate to operate normally,
reset the power liftgate as follows:
1. Put the automatic shift lever in P
(Park) or the manual shift lever in
N (Neutral).
2. While pressing the liftgate close
button, press the liftgate handle
switch for more than 3 seconds.
(the chime will sound)
3. Close the liftgate manually.
If the power liftgate does not work
properly after the above procedure,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the power liftgate does not operate
normally, first check the following
condition before using the power
liftgate.
Make sure the automatic shift lever
is in P (Park) or the manual shift
lever is in N (Neutral).
Power liftgate opening height
user setting
The driver may set the height of a
fully opened liftgate by following the
below instruction.
1. Position the liftgate manually to
the height you prefer.
2. Press the liftgate close button for
more than 3 seconds.
3. You will hear the system beep twice
indicating height has been set up.
The liftgate will open to the height
the driver has set up.
OUM044012L
433
Features of your vehicle
Smart Power Liftgate
(if equipped)
On a vehicle equipped with a smart
key, the liftgate can be opened using
the Smart Power Liftgate system.
How to use the Smart Power
Liftgate
The liftgate can be opened with no-
touch activation satisfying all the
conditions below.
• After 15 seconds when all doors
are closed and locked
• Positioned in the detecting area for
more than 3 seconds.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The Smart Power Liftgate does
not operate when:
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and is contin-
uously detected.
- The smart key is detected within
15 seconds after the doors are
closed and locked, and within 60
inches (1.5 m) from the front
door handles. (for vehicles
equipped with Welcome Light)
- A door is not locked or closed.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
1. Setting
To activate the Smart Power Liftgate,
go to User Settings Mode and select
Smart Power Liftgate on the LCD
display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.
OUMA044015
Features of your vehicle
344
2. Detect and Alert
If you are positioned in the detecting
area (20~40 inches (50 ~100 cm)
behind the vehicle) carrying a smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and chime will sound for about
3 seconds to alert you the smart key
has been detected and the liftgate
will open.
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not approach the detecting area
if you do not want the liftgate to
open. If you have unintentionally
entered the detecting area and the
hazard warning lights and chime
starts to operate, leave the detecting
area with the smart key. The liftgate
will stay closed.
3. Automatic opening
The hazard warning lights will blink
and chime will sound 2 times and
then the liftgate will open.
OUMA044016 OUMA044017
435
Features of your vehicle
Make sure you close the liftgate
before driving your vehicle.
Make sure there are no people or
objects around the liftgate before
opening or closing the liftgate. Make
sure objects in the liftgate do not
come out when opening the liftgate
on a slope. It may cause serious
injury. Make sure to deactivate the
Smart Power Liftgate when washing
your vehicle. Otherwise, the liftgate
may open inadvertently. The key
should be kept out of reach of chil-
dren. Children may inadvertently
open the Smart Power Liftgate while
playing around the rear area of the
vehicle.
How to deactivate the Smart
Power Liftgate function using the
smart key
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Liftgate open
4. Panic
If you press any button of the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Power Liftgate func-
tion will be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Power Liftgate
function for emergency situations.
CAUTION - Liftgate lift
Make certain that you close the
liftgate before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
to the liftgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the liftgate
is not closed prior to driving.
OXM043001
Features of your vehicle
364
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you press the door unlock but-
ton (2), the Smart Power Liftgate
function will be deactivated tem-
porarily. But, if you do not open
any door for 30 seconds, the smart
power liftgate function will be
activated again.
• If you press the liftgate open but-
ton (3) for more than 1 second, the
liftgate opens.
• If you press the door lock button
(1) or liftgate open button (3) when
the Smart Power Liftgate function
is not in the Detect and Alert stage,
the smart power liftgate function
will not be deactivated.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Power Liftgate function by
pressing the smart key button and
opened a door, the smart power
liftgate function can be activated
again by closing and locking all
doors.
Detecting area
• The Smart Power Liftgate operates
with a welcome alert if the smart
key is detected within 20~40 inch-
es (50~100 cm) from the liftgate.
• The alert stops once the smart key
is positioned outside the detecting
area during the Detect and Alert
stage.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The Smart Power Liftgate function
will not work if any of the following
occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can
interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The detecting range may decrease
or increase when :
- One side of the tire is raised to
replace a tire or to inspect the
vehicle.
- The vehicle is parked on a slope
or unpaved road, etc.
OUMA044019
437
Features of your vehicle
Emergency liftgate safety
release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency liftgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the lift-
gate. When someone is inadvertent-
ly locked in the cargo area, the lift-
gate can be opened by pushing the
release lever and pushing open the
liftgate.
WARNING
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the cargo area of the
vehicle at any time. The cargo
area is a very dangerous loca-
tion in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only. Use with
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.
OUMA044009
Features of your vehicle
384
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
up/down* (Driver's and
Passenger's window)
(7) Power window and rear sunroof*
lock switch
* if equipped
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OUMA044020
439
Features of your vehicle
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door's win-
dow. The driver has a power window
lock button which can block the oper-
ation of passenger windows. The
power windows can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.
However, if the front doors are
opened, the power windows cannot
be operated even within the 30 sec-
ond period.
✽✽
NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
OYP044035K
Features of your vehicle
404
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers
or raises the window even when the
switch is released. To stop the window
at the desired position while the win-
dow is in operation, pull up or press
down and release the switch.
If the power window does not operate
normally, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the driver's and passenger's
window and continue pulling up
the driver’s power window switch
for at least 1 second after the win-
dow is completely closed.
Automatic reversal
(for Auto up/down window)
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)
to allow the object to be cleared.
The distance may vary based on the
size or position of the window. If the
window detects the resistance while
the power window switch is pulled up
continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower
approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).
OYP044033K
OUN026013
441
Features of your vehicle
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window rever-
sal will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
Always check for obstructions before
raising any window to avoid injuries
or vehicle damage. If an object less
than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter is
caught between the window glass
and the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may not
detect the resistance and will not
stop and reverse direction.
Power window lock button
• The driver can disable the power
window switches on the passenger
doors by pressing the power win-
dow lock button located on the dri-
ver’s door to the LOCK position
(pressed).
• When the power window lock
switch is pressed :
- The driver's master control can
operate all the power windows.
- The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's
power window.
- The rear passenger's control can-
not operate the rear passenger's
power window.
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
OUM044021
CAUTION - Opening /clos-
ing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
WARNING - Power win-
dows
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the power window lock switch
(on the driver's door) in the
LOCK (pressed) position.
Features of your vehicle
424
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P (Park) position
and setting the parking brake.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, pull the second-
ary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).
3. Raise the hood. It will completely
rise by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
HOOD
OUM044022
OUM044023
443
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the engine com-
partment must be correctly
installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
WARNING - Hood
obstruction
Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in severe personal injury.
WARNING - Fire risk
Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING - Unsecured
engine hood
Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driv-
en, causing a total loss of visi-
bility, which might result in an
accident.
Features of your vehicle
444
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pressing
the fuel filler lid opener button.
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the
fuel filler lid opener button.
3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks” once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
in lightly making sure that it is
securely closed.
✽✽
NOTICE
There may be an intermittent noise
near the refueling hole while the
engine is idling if the fuel cap is not
closed securely. This occurs normal-
ly with the OBD system.
✽✽
NOTICE
When refueling on unlevel ground,
the fuel gauge may not point to the F
position.
It is not a malfunction. If you move
your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel
gauge will move to the full position.
FUEL FILLER LID
OUM044025
OUMA044024
445
Features of your vehicle
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
✽✽
NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks once,
otherwise the fuel cap open warning
indicator light will illuminate
WARNING - Fire/explo-
sion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facili-
ty. Failure to follow all warnings
may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.
WARNING - Static
electricity
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or
fabric (polyester, satin, nylon,
etc.) capable of producing stat-
ic electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors resulting in rapid burn-
ing. If you must reenter the
vehicle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity discharge
by touching a metal part of the
vehicle, away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle or other gasoline
source.
WARNING - Refueling
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap. If
pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and subject you to the risk of
fire and burns.
Features of your vehicle
464
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the “Fuel requirements”
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replace-
ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehi-
cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control sys-
tem.
WARNING - Cell phone
fires
Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current
and/or electronic interference
from cellular phones can poten-
tially ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire.
WARNING - Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
WARNING - Refueling &
Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
WARNING - Portable fuel
container
When using an approved portable
fuel container, be sure to place
the container on the ground prior
to refueling. Static electricity dis-
charge from the container can
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
Once refueling has begun, con-
tact with the vehicle should be
maintained until the filling is com-
plete. Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
447
Features of your vehicle
Emergency fuel filler lid release
If the fuel filler lid does not open
using the remote fuel filler lid
release, you can open it manually.
Remove the panel in the cargo area.
Pull the handle out slightly.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
area trim or release handle may
be damaged.
OUM044026
Features of your vehicle
484
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can be operated for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to
the ACC or LOCK (or OFF) position.
However, if the front door is opened,
the sunroof cannot be operated even
within the 30 second period.
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION
- Sunroof
control lever
Do not continue to press the sun-
roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or
tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could occur.
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
To prevent damage to the sun-
roof, periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
OUM044027
WARNING - Roof cargo
Do not operate the sun roof
while using the roof rack to
transport cargo.This may cause
the cargo to come loose and
distract the driver.
449
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key
(smart key: turns off the engine)
when the sunroof is not fully closed,
the warning chime will sound for a
few seconds and a message will
appear on the LCD display or warn-
ing indicator will illuminate.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
WARNING
• Never adjust the sunroof or
sunshade while driving. This
could result in loss of control
and an accident that may
cause death, serious injury, or
property damage.
• Do not allow children to oper-
ate the sunroof.
CAUTION
Do not extend any luggage out
side the sunroof while driving.
OUM044134
CAUTION
Make sure the sunroof is fully
closed when leaving your vehi-
cle. If the sunroof is opened,
rain or snow may leak through
the sunroof and wet the interior.
Features of your vehicle
504
Sunshade
To open the sunshade
Pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the 1st detent position.
To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or pull it down to the 1st detent
position.
To stop the sliding at any point, press
the sunshade control switch momen-
tarily.
✽✽
NOTICE
Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as
material characteristic are normal.
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
Pull the sunroof control lever back-
ward to the 2nd detent position, both
the sunshade and sunroof glass will
slide all the way open. To stop the
sunroof movement at any point, pull
or push the sunroof control glass
lever momentarily.
OUM044028
CAUTION - Automatic
sunroof shade
• Do not pull or push the sun-
shade by hand as such action
may damage the sunshade or
cause it to malfunction.
• Close the sunroof when driv-
ing in dusty environments.
Dust may cause a malfunction
of the vehicle system.
OUM044029
451
Features of your vehicle
When the sunshade is opened
Pull the sunroof glass control lever
backward to the 1st or 2nd detent
position, the sunroof glass will be
opened.
To stop the sunroof glass movement
at any point, pull or push the sunroof
control lever momentarily.
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof is closing
automatically, it will reverse the direc-
tion, and then stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash.
You should always check that all pas-
sengers and objects are away from
the sunroof before closing it.
OXM049029
WARNING - Sunroof
Operation
When closing the sunroof, make
sure there are no body parts in
the movement range of the slid-
ing roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.
WARNING - Sunroof
Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sun-
roof while driving.
Features of your vehicle
524
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
Push the sunroof control lever upward,
the sunshade will slide halfway open
then the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
Push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass with
the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or downward to the 2nd detent
position. The sunroof glass and sun-
shade will close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward or downward to the 1st detent
position. The sunroof glass will close
automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
OUM044030
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to the sun-
roof periodically remove any
dirt that may accumulate on
the guide rail.
• If you drive with the sunroof
opened right after a vehicle
wash or rain, water may get
inside the vehicle and cause
damage to the interior.
CAUTION - Sunroof motor
damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be
damaged.
453
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, you must
reset your sunroof system as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the sunshade and sunroof
completely if opened.
3. Release the sunroof control lever.
4. Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close for
about (5 ~10 seconds) until the sun-
roof operates as follows: SUN-
SHADE OPENS → GLASS TILTS
UP → SOUND OF MOTOR’S
‘CLICK’ and then release the button.
[Do not release the button on
movement. (initialization of reset
will fail)]
5. Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close for
about (1 ~2 seconds), until the sun-
roof operates as follows: GLASS
CLOSE → GLASS OPEN →
GLASS/SUNSHADE CLOSE and
then release the button. [Do not
release the button on movement.
(initialization failed)]
When this is complete, the sunroof
system has been reset and one
touch open and close should be
restored.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you do not reset the sunroof, it
may not work properly.
Features of your vehicle
544
Electric power steering (EPS)
The power steering uses a motor to
assist you in steering the vehicle. If
the engine is off or if the power steer-
ing system becomes inoperative, the
vehicle may still be steered, but it will
require increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by a power steering con-
trol unit which senses the steering
wheel torque and vehicle speed to
command the motor.
The steering becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s
speed decreases for optimum steer-
ing control.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster.The steering
wheel may require increased
steering effort. Take your vehicle to
an authorized Kia dealer and have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, noise
may occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will likely disappear. This is a
normal condition.
• When the vehicle is stationary, and
the steering wheel is turned all the
way to the left or right continuous-
ly, the steering wheel becomes
harder to turn. The power assist is
limited to protect the motor from
overheating.
As time passes, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
✽✽
NOTICE
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not
illuminate.
• The steering gets heavy immedi-
ately after turning the ignition
switch on. This happens as the sys-
tem performs the EPS system
diagnostics. When the diagnostics
are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or
LOCK (OFF) position.
• A motor noise may be heard when
the vehicle is at a stop or at a low
driving speed.
• If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally,
the warning light will illuminate on
the instrument cluster. The steer-
ing wheel may become difficult to
control or operate abnormally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
(Continued)
STEERING WHEEL
455
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, abnor-
mal noise may occur. If tempera-
ture rises, the noise will likely dis-
appear. This is a normal condition.
• When the charging system warning
light comes on due to the low volt-
age (When the alternator or bat-
tery) does not operate normally or
malfunctions), the steering wheel
may require increased steering
effort.
Tilt and telescopic steering
Tilt and telescopic steering allows
you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive.You can also raise it
to give your legs more room when
you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock-release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3, if
equipped) then pull up the lock-
release lever to lock (4) the steering
wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the
steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion before driving.
OUMA044031
WARNING - Steering
wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control.
Features of your vehicle
564
✽✽
NOTICE
After adjustment, sometimes the
lock release lever may not lock the
steering wheel. It is not a malfunc-
tion. This occurs when two gears are
not engaged correctly. In this case,
adjust the steering wheel again and
then lock the steering wheel.
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, pressing the heated steer-
ing wheel button warms the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button
will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off.
✽✽
NOTICE
The heated steering wheel will turn
off automatically approximately 30
minutes after the heated steering
wheel is turned on.
OUMA046032
WARNING
If the steering wheel becomes
too warm, turn the system off.
The heated steering wheel may
cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
457
Features of your vehicle
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbols on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
✽✽
NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on
your steering wheel (see illustra-
tion). The horn will operate only
when this area is pressed.
OUMA044033
CAUTION
• Do not install any type of grip
cover for the steering wheel, it
may impair the function of the
heated steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated
steering wheel, do not use an
organic solvent such as paint
thinner, benzene, alcohol and
gasoline. Doing so may dam-
age the surface of the steering
wheel.
• If the surface of steering
wheel is damaged by sharp
object, damage to the heated
steering wheel components
could occur.
Features of your vehicle
584
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
or cargo area which would interfere
with your vision through the rear win-
dow.
Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during
night driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
WARNING - Mirror adjust-
ment
Do not adjust the rearview mir-
ror while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol.
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror
and don’t install a wide mirror. It
could result in injury, during an
accident or deployment of the
air bag.
OAM049023
Day
Night
459
Features of your vehicle
Electric chromatic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric rearview mirror automat-
ically controls the glare from the
headlights of the vehicles behind you
in nighttime or low light driving condi-
tions.The sensor mounted in the mir-
ror senses the light level around the
vehicle, and automatically controls
the headlight glare from the vehicles
behind you.
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion off. The mirror indicator light
will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (1) to
turn the automatic dimming func-
tion on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.
CAUTION - Cleaning
mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror. It may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
OUMA044407
Indicator
Sensor
Features of your vehicle
604
Electric chromatic mirror (ECM)
with compass (if equipped)
1. Feature Control Button
2. Status Indicator LED
3. Rear Light Sensor
4. Compass Display Window
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
The NVS
®
Mirror in your vehicle is
the most advanced way to reduce
annoying glare in the rearview mirror
during any driving situation. For more
information regarding NVS
®
mirrors
and other applications, please refer
to the Gentex website:
www.gentex.com
✽✽
NOTICE
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare during driving condi-
tions based upon light levels moni-
tored in front of the vehicle and
from the rear of the vehicle. These
light sensors are visible through
openings in the front and rear of the
mirror case. Any object that would
obstruct either light sensor will
degrade the automatic dimming
control feature.
Automatic-dimming function
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The auto-
dimming function can be controlled
by pushing the ON/OFF Button:
1. Pressing the button turns the auto-
dimming function OFF which is
indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing the button again turns
the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on.
✽✽
NOTICE
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
OUMA044407
461
Features of your vehicle
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed in this sec-
tion.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
ing. This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
Features of your vehicle
624
To adjust the Zone setting:
1. Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the button for more
than 3 but less than 6 seconds,
the current Zone Number will
appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle's magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct for these changes. To re-cali-
brate the compass:
B520C05NF
463
Features of your vehicle
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 6 seconds. When the com-
pass memory is cleared a "C" will
appear in the display.
2. To calibrate the compass, drive
the vehicle in 2 complete circles at
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Electrochromic mirror with
HomeLink system (if equipped)
To operate the electric rearview mirror
Press the I button (1) to turn the
automatic- dimming function on. The
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the O button (2) to turn the
automatic- dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
Your new mirror comes with an
integrated HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, which allows you to pro-
gram the mirror to activate your
garage door(s), estate gate, home
lighting, etc. The mirror actually
learns the codes from your various
existing transmitters.
OHD046025N
OHD046305N
Glare detection sensor
Indicator light
Homelink buttons
Features of your vehicle
644
Retain the original transmitter for
future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also sug-
gested that upon the sale of the vehi-
cle, the programmed HomeLink but-
tons be erased for security purposes
(follow step 1 in the “Programming”
portion of this text).
Programming
Your vehicle may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the ACC posi-
tion for programming and/or opera-
tion of HomeLink. It is also recom-
mended that a new battery be
replaced in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink for quicker training and
accurate transmission of the radio-
frequency.
Follow these steps to train your
HomeLink mirror:
1. When programming the buttons for
the first time, press and hold the
left and center buttons (
,
)
simultaneously until the indicator
light begins to flash after approxi-
mately 20 seconds. (This proce-
dure erases the factory-set default
codes. Do not perform this step
when programming the additional
HomeLink buttons.)
OHD046306N
Flashing
465
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
For non rolling code garage door
openers, follow steps 2 - 3.
For rolling code garage door open-
ers, follow steps 2 - 6.
For Canadian Programming, please
follow the Canadian Programming
section.
For help with determining whether
your garage door opener is
non-rolling code or rolling code,
please refer to the garage door open-
ers owner’s manual or contact
HomeLink customer service at 1-
800-355-3515.
2. Press and hold the button on the
HomeLink system you wish to
train and the button on the trans-
mitter while the transmitter is
approximately 2-8 cm (1 to 3 inch-
es) away from the mirror. Do not
release the buttons until step 3
has been completed.
3. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapid flashing light
indicates successful programming
of the new frequency signal.)
✽✽
NOTICE
Some gate and garage door openers
may require you to replace step #3
with the “cycling” procedure noted
in the “Canadian Programming”
section of this document.
OHD046307N
Flashing
1-3inches
Transmitter
Features of your vehicle
664
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped devices)
with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing
the “Programming” portion of this
text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker
& easier.)
4. Locate the “learn” or “smart” but-
ton on the device’s motor head
unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by product
brand. If there is difficulty locating
the “learn” or “smart” button, refer-
ence the device’s owner’s manual
or contact HomeLink at 1-800-
355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
5. Press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button on the device’s
motor head unit. You have 30 sec-
onds to complete step number 6.
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press and release the pro-
grammed HomeLink button up to
three times. The rolling code
equipped device should now rec-
ognize the HomeLink signal and
activate when the HomeLink but-
ton is pressed. The remaining two
buttons may now be programmed
if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the “Programming”
portion of this text.
Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press the
programmed HomeLink button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, securi-
ty system, entry door lock, estate
gate, or home or office lighting). For
convenience, the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device may also be used
at any time. The HomeLink Wireless
Controls System (once programmed)
or the original hand-held transmitter
may be used to activate the device
(e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
etc.). In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
467
Features of your vehicle
Erasing programmed HomeLink
buttons
To erase the three programmed but-
tons (individual buttons cannot be
erased):
• Press and hold the left and center
buttons simultaneously, until the
indicator light begins to flash
(approximately 20 seconds).
Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink button
To program a device to HomeLink
using a HomeLink button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired
HomeLink button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the hand-held transmitter
2-8 cm (1 to 3 inches) away from
the HomeLink surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button (or press and
“cycle” - as described in “Canadian
Programming”).
4. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
The previous device has now been
erased and the new device can be
activated by pushing the HomeLink
button that has just been pro-
grammed. This procedure will not
affect any other programmed
HomeLink buttons.
Canadian Programming
Garage & gate openers
During programming, your hand-held
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press and
hold the HomeLink button (note
steps 2 through 4 in the
“Programming” portion of this text)
while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequen-
cy signal has been learned. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
OHD046306N
Flashing
Features of your vehicle
684
Accessories
If you would like additional informa-
tion on the HomeLink Wireless
Control System, HomeLink compati-
ble products, or to purchase other
accessories such as the HomeLink
®
Lighting Package, please contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
This device complies with part 15
of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifica-
tions not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to
operate the device.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust the mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be fold-
ed back to prevent damage during an
automatic vehicle wash or when
passing through a narrow street.
469
Features of your vehicle
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use an
approved spray de-icer (not radiator
antifreeze) to release the frozen
mechanism or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
Adjusting outside rearview mirror
Adjusting the rearview mirrors:
Press either the L (driver’s side) or R
(passenger’s side) button (1) to
select the rearview mirror you would
like to adjust when the ignition switch
is ACC or ON position.
Use the mirror adjustment control (2)
to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After adjustment, press the L or R
button (1) again to prevent inadver-
tent adjustment.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
CAUTION - Rearview
mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict the movement of the mir-
ror, do not force the mirror for
adjustment.To remove ice, use a
deicer spray, or a sponge or soft
cloth with very warm water.
OUMA044034
Features of your vehicle
704
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
While the vehicle is moving rear-
ward, the outside rearview mirror(s)
will move downward to aid reverse
parking. According to the position of
the outside rearview mirror switch
(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) will
operate as follows:
L/R : When the remote control outside
rearview mirror switch is select-
ed to the L (left) or R (right) posi-
tion, both outside rearview mir-
rors will move downward.
Neutral : When the remote control
outside rearview mirror
switch is placed in the mid-
dle, the outside rearview
mirrors will not operate
while the vehicle is moving
rearward.
The outside rearview mirrors will auto-
matically revert to their original posi-
tions under the following conditions:
1. The ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
2. Shift lever is moved to any position
except R (Reverse).
3. Remote control outside rearview
mirror switch is placed in the middle.
CAUTION - Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch longer
than necessary, the motor
may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
OUMA044035
471
Features of your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Electric type
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch when the ignition switch is
ACC or ON position as below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold auto-
matically as follows:
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the folding key or smart key.
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by the
button on the outside door handle.
• The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession.
Manual type
To fold the outside rearview mirror,
grasp the housing of the mirror and
then fold it toward the rear of the
vehicle.
OUM044036
CAUTION - Electric type
outside rearview mirror
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
engine start/stop button is in the
OFF position. However, to prevent
unnecessary battery discharge,
do not adjust the mirrors longer
than necessary while the engine
is not running.
In case it is an electric type out-
side rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
OUM044289L
Features of your vehicle
724
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights
OUMA044100/OUMA044101
■■
Type A
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
■■
Type B
473
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is changed by
pressing the illumination control button
("+" or "-") when the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the
tale lights are turned on.
• If you hold the illumination control
button ("+" or "-"), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) : MODE button for changing
the LCD modes
(2) ▲ / ▼ : MOVE move scroll switch
to select the items
(3) OK : SET/RESET button for set
the items or reset the items
(Push scroll wheel switch :
for Type B)
OUMA044209
OUM044265L
OUMA044037
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
744
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
meters per hour (km/h).
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
OYP044103N
CAUTION - Red zone
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
OUM044202L
OUM044205L
■ Type A
■ Type B, C
475
Features of your vehicle
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the “H”
position, it indicates overheating that
may damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an over-
heated engine. If your vehicle over-
heats, refer to “If the Engine
Overheats” in chapter 6.
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
WARNING - Hot radiator
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pres-
sure and could cause severe
burns. Wait until the engine is
cool before adding coolant to
the reservoir.
OUM044105
■ Type A
■ Type B
OUM044106
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
764
✽✽
NOTICE
Fuel display may not be accurate if
you are filling in sloping places.
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999,999
miles or 1,599,999 kilometers.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Stop and obtain additional fuel
as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when
the gauge indicator comes
close to the E level. Running out
of fuel can expose vehicle occu-
pants to danger.
CAUTION - Low fuel
Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
OUMA044412
■ Type A
OUMA044413
■ Type B
OUMA044410
■ Type A
OUMA044411
■ Type B
477
Features of your vehicle
To change the temperature unit (from
°C to °F or from °F to °C)
The temperature unit can be
changed by using the "User
Settings" mode of the LCD display.
❈ For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
•Park :P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
•Drive :D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Icy Road Warning Indicator
This warning light is to warn the driv-
er the road may be icy.
When the following conditions occur,
the warning light (including Outside
Temperature Gauge) blinks 10 times
and then illuminates, and also warn-
ing chime sounds 3 times.
- The temperature on the Outside
Temperature Gauge is below
approximately 40°F (4°C).
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.
OUM04411
■ Type A ■ Type B
OUMA044430
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
784
LCD DISPLAY
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
LCD Modes
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Tur n By Turn
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the navigation.
ASCC/LDWS
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC)
and Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more details, refer to "Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC)" or
"Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter 5.
A/V
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Information
This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days).
This mode informs of warning messages related to washer fluid or malfunction of
Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) and so on.
When any door is not closed securely, this symbol is illuminated.
User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps and so on.
479
Features of your vehicle
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽✽
NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes Fuel Economy
Range (1)
• The range is the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 1 ~ 9,999 mi or
1 ~ 9,999 km.
• If the estimated distance is below
1mi. (1km), the trip computer will
display “---” as range.
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the range function may
not operate correctly.
TRIP MODES (TRIP COMPUTER)
Digital speedometer
To change the trip mode, scroll the
TRIP scroll switch (▲/▼) in the trip
computer mode.
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
OYP044147N
Features of your vehicle
804
• The range may differ from the actu-
al driving distance as it is an esti-
mate of the available driving dis-
tance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters
(1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to
the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and range may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and con-
dition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To reset average fuel economy manu-
ally, press the OK button (reset) on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average fuel econ-
omy is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refu-
eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).
✽✽
NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50
meters) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 50 MPG
or 0 ~ 30 L/100km
481
Features of your vehicle
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. or
km
To reset the tripmeter, press the OK
button (reset) on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h
To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the OK button (reset) on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec-
ond when the average vehicle speed
is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 0.03 miles (50 meters) or the
driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in
motion, the average vehicle speed
keeps going while the engine is
running.
Timer (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
To reset elapsed time, press the OK
button (reset) on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
OUMA044408
Features of your vehicle
824
Digital speedometer
This mode displays the current
speed of the vehicle.
One time driving information
mode
This display shows trip distance (1),
average fuel economy (2) and the
estimated distance that the vehicle
can be driven with the remaining fuel
(3).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally. The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below
1mi. (1km), the range (3) will display
as "---" and a refuel message will
appear (4).
OYP044192N
OYP044193N
483
Features of your vehicle
Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
ASCC/LDWS Mode
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
Advanced Smart Cruise Control
(ASCC) and Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS).
For more information, refer to
"Advanced Smart Cruise Control
(ASCC)" and "Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter
5.
A/V Mode (if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
OUM054126L
OYP044273NOUMA057232
Features of your vehicle
844
Service Mode
Tire Pressure
This mode displays the pressure sta-
tus of each tire.
You can change the tire pressure unit
in "User settings" mode.
❈ For more information, refer to "Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.
Service Interval
Service interval
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time reach-
es 900 mi. (1,500 km) or 30 days.
Service interval message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the preset service
interval.
“Service required” message is dis-
played for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you preset before:
Press the OK button (reset) for more
than 1 second.
OYP044314N
OUM044266L
OYP044119N
485
Features of your vehicle
Service interval OFF
If the service interval is not set
"Service interval OFF” message is
displayed on the LCD display.
If you want to activate Service inter-
val function, set the service interval
in the User setting mode.
For more details, refer to “User set-
ting mode" in this chapter.
✽✽
NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
Master Warning Mode
• This warning light informs the driv-
er of the following situations
- Low washer fluid
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Lane Departure warning system
(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)
- Advanced smart cruise control
system (ASCC) malfunction
(if equipped)
- Service reminder (if equipped)
- Lamp malfunction and so on.
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned
off and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon
( ). (ex : refill the washer fluid)
OYP044122N
Features of your vehicle
864
User Settings Mode
Description
In this mode, you can change setting
of the doors, lights, and so on.
Driving Assist
Smart Cruise Control Response
(if equipped)
Choose the sensitivity of the smart
cruise control.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if equipped)
If this item is checked, rear cross
traffic alert function will be activated.
Assist Emergency Braking (AEB) (if
equipped)
If this item is checked, Assist emer-
gency braking function will be acti-
vated.
Forward Collision Warning
(if equipped)
If this item is checked, forward collision
warning function will be activated.
Door / Liftgate
Automatically lock
• Disable:
The auto door lock operation will
be deactivated.
• Enable on speed:
All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed
exceeds 9.3mph (15km/h).
• Enable on shift:
All doors will be automatically
locked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted from the P
(Park) position to the R (Reverse),
N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
OYP044161N
487
Features of your vehicle
Automatically unlock
• Disable:
The auto door unlock operation will
be canceled.
• On Key out:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• On shift to P:
All doors will be automatically
unlocked if the automatic transaxle
shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
Two Press Unlock
• Off:
The two press unlock function will
be deactivated.Therefore, all doors
will unlock if the door is unlocked.
• On:
The driver’s door will unlock if the
door is unlocked. When the door is
unlocked again within 4 seconds,
all doors will unlock.
Horn Feedback
• Off:
The Horn feedback operation will
be deactivated.
• On:
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.
Power liftgate (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the power lift-
gate function will be activated.
Smart Power liftgate (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the smart
power liftgate function will be activat-
ed.
Features of your vehicle
884
Lights
One touch turn signal
If this item is checked, the lane
change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7
times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
• On : You can set the one touch turn
sginal function.
• Off : The One touch turn signal
function will be deactivated.
Head Lamp Delay (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the headlamp
delay function will be activated.
Welcome Light (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the welcome
light function of the pocket lamp will
be activated.
Sound
Park assist system vol. (if equipped)
Adjust the Park Assist System vol-
ume. (Level 1~3).
Blind spot detection Sound (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the blind spot
detection sound function will be acti-
vated.
Welcome sound(if equipped)
If this item is checked, the welcome
sound function will be activated.
Seat / Steering
Seat easy access (if equipped)
If this item is checked, the driver’s
seat will automatically move forward
or rearward for the driver to enter or
exit the vehicle comfortably.
Steering Position
If this item is checked, the warning
function regarding the steering wheel
alignment will be activated.
Service interval
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).
• Off : The service interval function
will be deactivated.
• On : You can set the service inter-
val (mileage and months).
489
Features of your vehicle
Other features
Fuel economy auto reset
• Off :
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refuel-
ing.
• On (Auto Reset) :
The average fuel economy will reset
automatically when refueling.
For more details, refer to “Trip
modes" in this chapter.
Wiper/Light Display (if equipped)
If this item checked, LCD display
shows a selected wiper/light mode
whenever you chang its mode.
Sub-Scale (for Type B cluster)
If this item checked, Sub-scale
speedometer will be displayed in the
cluster.
Fuel Economy Unit
Choose the fuel economy unit. (US
gallon, liter)
Temperature Unit
Convert the temperature unit from °C
to °F or from °F to °C.
Tire Pressure Unit
Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi,
kPa, Bar)
Language
Choose the language you prefer
within the LCD.
Warning Messages
Shift to P position
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
OYP044131N
Features of your vehicle
904
Low Key Battery
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
Press start button while turn
steering (for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the steering wheel does not
unlock normally when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is pressed.
• It means that you should press the
Engine Start/Stop Button while turn-
ing the steering wheel right and left.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
OYP044125N OYP044271N OYP044133N
491
Features of your vehicle
Key not in vehicle
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
Press start button again
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
OYP044121N OYP044123N OYP044127N
Features of your vehicle
924
Press start button with key
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Check fuse BRAKE SWITCH
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
Shift to P or N to start engine
(for smart key system)
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽✽
NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
OYP044129N
OYP044137N
OYP044145N
493
Features of your vehicle
Door / Hood / liftgate Open
• It means that any door, hood, or
liftgate is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine and then
open the driver's door when the
sunroof is open.
Align steering wheel (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
OUM044133
OUM044134
OYP044141N
Features of your vehicle
944
Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
Turn on FUSE SWITCH
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
Low Fuel
This warning message illuminates if
the fuel tank is nearly empty.
- When the low fuel level warning
light is illuminated.
- When the trip computer displays
"--- mile (or km)" as range.
Add fuel as soon as possible.
OYP044139N
OYP044135N
OYP044276N
495
Features of your vehicle
Check high beam assist system
(if equipped)
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb or circuit malfunction) with the
headlamp. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Check headlight
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb except LED lamp or circuit mal-
function) with the headlamp. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
When replacing the bulb, use the
same wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 8.
Check AEB system (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if there is a malfunction with the
Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system. In this case, have
your vehicle be inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
For more details, refer to
"Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system" in chapter 5.
OYP044180N
OUM044271L OUMA057225
Features of your vehicle
964
Warning lights
✽✽
NOTICE - Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
497
Features of your vehicle
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required (For more details,
refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system are still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized Kia dealer
and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light ON is dangerous. If the Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light
illuminates when the parking brake
released, it indicates that the brake
fluid level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
984
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Electronic
Brake force Distribution
(EBD) System Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking thereby
increasing the risk of a crash.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible thereby
increasing the risk of a crash
and injury.
499
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - Electronic Brake
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
Electronic Power
Steering (EPS) Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Features of your vehicle
1004
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the
electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION - Catalytic
Converter Damage
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
tial catalytic converter damage
is possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
affect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
4101
Features of your vehicle
If the warning light stays on while the
engine is running, it indicates that
there may be serious engine dam-
age or malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check the
oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the
engine oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the warn-
ing light stays on after the engine
is started, turn the engine off
immediately. In this case, have
your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator pedal, apply the brakes
gradually with light force, and slow-
ly move to a safe position off the
road.
CAUTION - Engine
damage
If the engine is not stopped
immediately after the engine oil
pressure warning light is illumi-
nated and stays on while the
engine is running, serious
engine damage may result.
WARNING - Low tire
pressure
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving or low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
Features of your vehicle
1024
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
- Electronic Parking
Brake (EPB)
Warning Light
The Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light may illumi-
nate when the Electronic Stability
control (ESC) Indicator Light comes
on to indicate that the ESC is not
working properly (This does not
indicate malfunction of the EPB).
Master Warning light
(if equipped)
• This warning light informs the driv-
er of the following situations
- Low washer fluid (if equipped)
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal-
function (if equipped)
- Lane Departure warning system
(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) malfunction (if equipped)
- Advanced smart cruise control
system (ASCC) malfunction (if
equipped)
- High beam assist system (HBA)
malfunction (if equipped)
- Service required
- Lamp malfunction and so on.
CAUTION - Low Fuel
Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “0 or E” can cause
the engine to misfire and dam-
age the catalytic converter (if
equipped).
EPB
4103
Features of your vehicle
The Master Warning Light illumi-
nates when more than one of the
above warning situations occur. At
this time, the LCD Modes Icon will
change from ( ) to ( ).
If the warning situation is solved, the
master warning light will be turned off
and the LCD Modes Icon will be
changed back to its previous icon ( ).
(ex : refill the washer fluid)
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AWD system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Autonomous Emergency
Braking (AEB) Warning
light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When there is a malfunction with
the AEB.
In this case, have the vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFLS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• Once you set the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AFLS.
If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the warning light remains
on, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
AFLS
Features of your vehicle
1044
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (Without Smart Key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the vehicle detects the
immobilizer in your key properly
while the ignition switch is ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4105
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in section 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illumi-
nate at all.
Features of your vehicle
1064
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
High beam assist indica-
tor (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When the high-Beam is on with the
light switch in the AUTO light posi-
tion.
• If your vehicle detects oncoming or
preceding vehicles, the High beam
assist system will switch the high
beam to low beam automatically.
For more details, refer to "High beam
assist" in this chapter.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Washer Fluid Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the washer fluid level in the
reservoir is nearly empty.
In this case, you should refill the
washer fluid.
Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
CRUISE
4107
Features of your vehicle
Cruise SET Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
AUTO HOLD Indicator
Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD button.
• [Green] When you stop the vehicle
completely by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold sys-
tem activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the auto hold system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
❈ For more details, refer to “Auto
Hold” in chapter 5.
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you select AWD Lock mode
by pressing the AWD LOCK button.
- The AWD LOCK mode is to
increase the drive power when
driving on wet pavement, snow
covered roads and/or off-road.
SET
AUTO
HOLD
CAUTION - AWD Lock
Mode
Do not use AWD LOCK mode on
dry paved roads or highway, it
can cause noise, vibration or
damage of AWD related parts.
Features of your vehicle
1084
The rear parking assist system
assists the driver during backward
movement of the vehicle by chiming if
any object is sensed within a distance
of 47 in. (120 cm) behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental system
and it is not intended to nor does it
replace the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The sensing
range and objects detectable by the
back sensors are limited. Whenever
backing-up, pay as much attention to
what is behind you as you would in a
vehicle without a rear parking assist
system.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when the
indicator on the rear parking assist
OFF button is not illuminated. If
you desire to deactivate the rear
parking assist system, press the
rear parking assist OFF button
again. (The indicator on the button
will illuminate.) To turn the system
on, press the button again. (The
indicator on the button will go off.)
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
may not be activated correctly.
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Rear parking
assist system
Never rely solely on the rear
parking assist system. Always
perform a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction. Stop
immediately if you are aware of
a child anywhere near your vehi-
cle. Some objects may not be
detected by the sensors, due to
the object's size or material.
OUMA044046
Sensors
4109
Features of your vehicle
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
ON.
If the vehicle is moving at a speed
over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
may not be activated correctly.
• The sensing distance while the
back-up warning system is in oper-
ation is approximately 47 in. (120
cm) at the rear bumper center
area, 23.5 in. (60 cm) at the rear
bumper both side area.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 47 in. to 24 in.
(120 cm to 61 cm) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps intermit-
tently.
• When an object is 24 in. to 12 in.
(60 cm to 31 cm) from the rear
bumper: Buzzer beeps more fre-
quently.
• When an object is within 12 in. (30
cm) of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
The rear parking assist system
may not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when the
moisture has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps,
gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive
noise (vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes)
are within range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are within range of the
sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
Features of your vehicle
1104
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter such as snow or water.
(The sensing range will return to
normal when removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the
sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than
40 in. (1 m) in height and narrower
than 6 in. (14 cm) in diameter.
Rear parking assist system
precautions
• The rear parking assist system
may not sound consistently
depending on the speed and
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 15 in. (40 cm)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or cov-
ered with snow, dirt, or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until the
material is removed using a soft
cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor. Sensor damage could
occur.
✽✽
NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors. It cannot detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
such as poles or objects located
between sensors may not be detected
by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the
vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the systems
capabilities and limitations.
4111
Features of your vehicle
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the gear to the
R (Reverse) position, this may indi-
cate a malfunction in the rear parking
assist system. If this occurs, have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽
NOTICE
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occu-
pants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
Features of your vehicle
1124
The rearview camera will activate
with the ignition switch ON and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem that shows behind the vehicle
through the rearview display mirror
while backing up unless equipped
with a navigation system, then will
display on the screen.
The rearview camera may be turned
off by pressing the ON/OFF button
when the rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press
the ON/OFF button again when the
ignition switch is on and the shift
lever in R (Reverse). Also, the cam-
era will turn on automatically when-
ever the ignition switch is turned off
and on again.
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
inside/outside rearview mirrors and
the area behind the vehicle before
and while backing up because
there is a dead zone that can't be
seen by the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with for-
eign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
❈ If your vehicle is equipped with
AVN(Audio, Video and Navigation)
system, rearview display will show
behind the vehicle through the
AVN monitor while backing-up.
Refer to a separately supplied
manual for detailed information.
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Backing &
using camera
Never rely solely on the rear view
camera when backing. You must
always use methods of viewing
the area behind you including
looking over both shoulders as
well as continuously checking all
three rear view mirrors. Due to
the difficulty of ensuring that the
area behind you remains clear,
always back slowly and stop
immediately if you even suspect
that a person, and especially a
child, might be behind you.
OUMA044049
OUMA046050
4113
Features of your vehicle
The Surround View Monitoring
System (SVM) is not a substitute for
proper and safe parking procedures.
The Surround View Monitoring
System (SVM) may not detect every
object surrounding the vehicle.
Always drive safely and use caution
when parking.
The Surround View Monitoring
System (SVM) can assist in parking
by allowing the driver to see around
the vehicle. Push the button into the
[ON] position to operate the system.
To cancel the system, push the but-
ton again.
Operating conditions
- When the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON position
- When the transaxle is on D, N or R
- When the vehicle speed is not over
12.4 mph (20km/h)
• When the vehicle speed is over
12.4mph (20km/h), the SVM system
is turned off. If the vehicle speed is
not over 12.4mph (20km/h) after
turning off the SVM by over speed,
the SVM is not turned on.To operate
again, push the button.
• When the vehicle moves back-
wards, regardless of On/Off of but-
ton and vehicle speed, the SVM is
operated.
• When the trunk and driver/passen-
ger door are opened and the out-
side mirror is folded, the warning is
illuminated in SVM system.
• If the SVM system is not operating
normally, the system should be
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
• When the vehicle moves over
10km/h forward after moving back-
ward, the SVM screen will be
turned off.
SURROUND VIEW MONITORING SYSTEM (SVM) (IF EQUIPPED)
OUMA057230
WARNING
This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the area around the vehi-
cle before and while moving.
Features of your vehicle
1144
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged if the lights are left in the
ON position. The system automati-
cally shuts off the parking lights 30
seconds after the ignition key is
removed and the driver’s door is
opened and closed.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of the road at night
and opens the driver’s side door.
If necessary, to keep the parking
lights on when the ignition key is
removed, perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Auto light position (if equipped)
(3) Parking & Tail light
(4) Headlight position
Parking & Tail light ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position, the tail, license and
instrument panel lights will turn ON.
LIGHTING
OUM044055
OUMA046056
4115
Features of your vehicle
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position, the head, tail, license
lights will turn ON.
✽✽
NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light position (if equipped)
It will operate when the ignition is in
"ON" or the engine is running.
Select the light switch to "AUTO",
and the light will turn on or off
depending on the ambient light
detected by the sensor (1).
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
OUMA046054 OUM044059
OUMA046057
Features of your vehicle
1164
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor-
mal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A).The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating. They
will self-cancel after a turn is com-
pleted. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.
WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver’s vision.
OUM044058
OUM044060
4117
Features of your vehicle
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One touch turn signal
When changing lanes, move the lane
change switch to the direction you
want briefly. The lane change switch
will move back to the original position
but the turn signal will flash three
times. This function assists the driver
when changing lanes without press-
ing down on the lane change signal.
Depending on the vehicle, the driver
may select or deselect the one touch
turn signal function. For more details,
please refer to "vehicle settings" in
chapter 4.
✽✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlight is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog
light switch (1) to the OFF position.
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor.
Check headlight
This warning message illuminates if
there is a malfunction (burned-out
bulb except LED lamp or circuit mal-
function) with the headlamp. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
When replacing the bulb, use the
same wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
“BULB WATTAGE” in chapter 8.
OUM044061 OUMA044425
Features of your vehicle
1184
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Automatic type
To ensure the proper headlight beam
is used under various conditions, the
headlight beam levels are automati-
cally adjusted depending on the
number of passengers, the weight in
the trunk, and other driving condi-
tions.
✽✽
NOTICE
If it does not work properly even
though your car is inclined backward
according to passenger's posture, or
the headlight beam is irradiated to
the high or low position, have the sys-
tem be inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Do not attempt to inspect or replace
the wiring yourself.
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses
the steering angle and vehicle
speed, to keep your field of vision
wide by swiveling and leveling the
headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON.
To turn off the AFLS, change the
switch to other positions. After turn-
ing the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling
no longer occurs, but leveling oper-
ates continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
location and restart the engine. If the
indicator continuously remains on,
have system be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
OUMA046057
4119
Features of your vehicle
A : Wiper speed control (front)
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control*
· HI – Continuous wipe
· LO – Intermittent wipe*
· OFF – Off
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)*
* if equipped
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
move the lever to this (MIST)
position and release it. The
wipers will operate continu-
ously if the lever is held in this
position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in light rain or mist.
To vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer
OUMA044063/OUMA046340
Features of your vehicle
1204
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls
the wiping cycle for the proper inter-
val. The more it rains, the faster the
wiper operates. When the rain stops,
the wipers stop.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the ignition switch is ON,
the wiper will operate once to per-
form a self-check of the system. Set
the wiper to OFF position when the
wiper is not in use.
OUMA044224
Rain sensor
CAUTION
• When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the OFF
position to stop the auto wiper
operation.
• The wiper may operate and be
damaged if the switch is set in
the AUTO mode while washing
the vehicle.
• Do not remove the sensor
cover located on the upper
end of the passenger side
windshield glass. Damage to
system parts could occur and
may not be covered by your
vehicle warranty.
(Continued)
CAUTION
When the ignition switch is ON
and the windshield wiper switch
is placed in the AUTO mode, use
caution in the following situa-
tions to avoid any injury to the
hands or other parts of the
body:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
4121
Features of your vehicle
Front windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
OUMA044068
CAUTION - Washer pump
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
WARNING - Obscured
visibility
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on the wind-
shield and obscure your vision.
(Continued)
• When starting the vehicle in
winter, set the wiper switch in
the OFF position. Otherwise,
wipers may operate and ice
may damage the windshield
wiper blades. Always remove
all snow and ice and defrost
the windshield properly prior
to operating the windshield
wipers.
• When tinting the windshield,
be careful of any fluid getting
into the sensor located in the
top center of the front wind-
shield. It may damage the
related parts.
Features of your vehicle
1224
Rear window wiper and wash-
er switch
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI : Continuous wipe
LO : Intermittent wipe
OFF : OFF
Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever
OUMA044067
OUMA044069
CAUTION - Wipers &
windshields
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or
other solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
4123
Features of your vehicle
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine is
not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off, if the
lights are in the ON position.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turn off approximately
3 seconds after the system enters
armed stage.
Room lamp
• : The light stays on at all times.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
WARNING - Interior
Lights
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents could happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
OUM044071
OUM044072
■ Type B
■ Type A
Features of your vehicle
1244
Map lamp
• Press the lens (A) to turn the map
lamp on.
To turn the map lamp off, press the
lens (A) again.
• (1) :
- The map lamp and room lamp
come on when a door is opened.
The lamps go out after approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
- The map lamp and room lamp
come on for approximately 30 sec-
onds when doors are unlocked
with a transmitter or smart key as
long as the doors are not opened.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on for approximately 20 min-
utes if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ACC or
LOCK/OFF position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
stay on continuously if the door is
opened with the ignition switch in
the ON position.
- The map lamp and room lamp will
go out immediately if the ignition
switch is changed to the ON posi-
tion or all doors are locked.
- To turn off the DOOR mode, press
the DOOR button (1) once again
(not pressed).
✽✽
NOTICE
The DOOR mode and ROOM mode
can not be selected at the same time.
• (2):
The map lamp stays on at all times.
• (3):
The map lamp of driver’s side stays
on at all times.
• (4):
The map lamp of passenger’s side
stays on at all times.
OUM046070
OUM044070
■ Type B
■ Type A
4125
Features of your vehicle
Luggage lamp (if equipped)
• : The light comes on when the
liftgate is opened.
• : The light stays off at all times.
• : The light stays on at all
times.
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror
will automatically turn on the mirror
light.
* The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehi-
cle may differ from the illustration.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
To prevent unnecessary charging
system drain, close the glove box
securely after using the glove box.
OUM044074 OUMA044432 OUM044073
CAUTION
- Vanity mirror
lamp
If you use the vanity mirror lamp,
turn off the lamp before return-
ing the sunvisor to its original
position, otherwise it could
result in battery discharge and
possible sunvisor damage.
Features of your vehicle
1264
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Headlight (Headlamp) escort
function
The headlights (and/or taillights)
remain on for approximately 5 min-
utes after the ignition key is removed
or turned to the ACC or LOCK posi-
tion. However, if the driver’s door is
opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the trans-
mitter or smart key twice or turning
off the light switch from the headlight
or Auto light position.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and lift-
gate) are locked and closed, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the transmitter.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off imme-
diately.
Pocket lamp (if equipped)
When all doors are locked and
closed, the pocket lamp will come on
for 15 seconds if any of the below is
performed.
• With the smart key system
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
button, the lamps will turn off imme-
diately.
4127
Features of your vehicle
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this sec-
tion.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel. The indicator on
the rear window defroster button illu-
minates when the defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the ignition switch is
turned off. To turn off the defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Wiper de-icer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper deicer, it will operate at the
same time you turn on the rear win-
dow defroster.
DEFROSTER
CAUTION - Conductors
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
OUM044145
Features of your vehicle
1284
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OUMA044147/OUMA044146/OUM044177
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Front windshield defroster button
3. Rear window defroster button
4. Air conditioning button
5. MAX A/C (Max air conditioning) button
6. Mode selection button
7. Air intake control button
8. Temperature control knob
9. 3rd row seat Air conditioning ON/OFF
button*
10. 3rd row seat Air conditioning Fan
speed control knob*
* If equipped
✽✽
NOTICE
Operating the blower when the ignition
switch is in the ACC position could cause
the battery to discharge. Only operate
the blower when the ignition switch is in
the ON position with the engine running.
■■
Type A
■■
Type B
■■
Type C
4129
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position (if
equipped).
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
OUM044149L
Features of your vehicle
1304
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash-
board outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent MAX
A/C, Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-
Defrost and Defrost air position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
(A, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
OUM044148
4131
Features of your vehicle
MAX A/C selection
To select the MAX A/C, turn the fan
speed control knob to the right then
press the MAX A/C button.
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the air temperature in the
passenger compartment, turn the
knob to the right position for warm and
hot air or left position for cooler air.
OUM044233L OUM044152
OUM044151
Features of your vehicle
1324
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to
select the outside (fresh) air position
or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, press the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (without
air conditioning selected) may cause
fogging of the windshield and side win-
dows and the air within the passenger
compartment may become stale. In
addition, prolonged use of the air con-
ditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system is operat-
ing, the outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically for ventilating
the car. Then, if you select the recir-
culated air position, the outside
(fresh) air will be selected automati-
cally after 3 minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
OUM044153L
OUM044153
■ Type B
■ Type A
WARNING - Reduced
visibility
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position may allow
humidity to increase inside the
vehicle which may fog the glass
and obscure visibility.
4133
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the "0" position.
OUM044154
OUMA044341
WARNING - Sleeping
with AC on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on as this may cause
serious harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level and/or
body temperature.
WARNING - Recirculated
air
Continued use of the climate
control system in the recirculat-
ed air position can cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
Features of your vehicle
1344
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Press the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
3
rd
row air conditioning
(if equipped)
To turn on the third row air condition-
ing control system
1.You can operate the third row air
conditioning system from the first
row control panel. Changing the front
row’s fan speed by turning the con-
trol knob will automatically change
the third row’s fan speed as well.
When the front row air conditioning
has been turned off and you want
to stop the A/C in the third row,
press the third row air conditioning
select button one more time. Then,
the third row’s A/C will also turn off.
2.The third row A/C system can be
separately controlled by the control
buttons in the third row. When the
A/C is ON or OFF, the third row A/C
control button in the front row will
turn ON or OFF, informing the front
passengers of the situation.
3.The fan speed of the third row air
conditioning can also be separate-
ly controlled by turning the fan
speed control knob.
OUM044155
OUM044156
4135
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
Air conditioning
Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with refrigerant*.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi-
tion.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• The refrigerant system should only
be serviced by trained and certified
technicians to insure proper and
safe operation.
• The refrigerant system should be
serviced in a well-ventilated place.
• The air conditioning evaporator
(cooling coil) shall never be repaired
or replaced with one removed from
a used or salvaged vehicle and new
replacement MAC evaporators shall
be certified (and labeled) as meet-
ing SAE Standard J2842.
Features of your vehicle
1364
✽✽
NOTICE
When opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning may
create water droplets inside the
vehicle. Since excessive water
droplets may cause damage to elec-
trical equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the win-
dows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture on the
insied surface of the windows on
rainy or humid days, decrease the
humidity inside the vehicle by oper-
ating the air conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
CAUTION - Excessive AC
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the tempera-
ture gauge closely while driving
up hills or in heavy traffic when
outside temperatures are high.
Air conditioning system opera-
tion may cause engine over-
heating. Continue to use the
blower fan but turn the air con-
ditioning system off if the tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
4137
Features of your vehicle
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected. If this hap-
pens, we recommend that the cli-
mate control air filter be replaced by
an authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent cli-
mate control air filter inspections
and changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, we recommend that the
system should be checked at an
authorized Kia dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
OXM063009
Features of your vehicle
1384
Each symbol and specification on
the air conditioning refrigerant label
is represented below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
You can find out which air condition-
ing refrigerant is applied to your vehi-
cle on the label inside of the engine
room.
Refer to section 8 for more detail on
the location of air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle's air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pres-
sure. If proper service proce-
dures are not followed an explo-
sion may result. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certi-
fied technicians.
CAUTION - AC Repair
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used, otherwise
damage to the vehicle may
occur. To prevent damage, the
air conditioning system in your
vehicle should only be serviced
by trained and certified techni-
cians.
4139
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OUMA044157/OUMA044158
1. Driver`s temperature control knob
2. Air conditioning button
3. Blower OFF button
4. Front windshield defroster button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Fan speed control button
7. Mode selection button
8. Air intake control button
9. Passenger`s temperature control knob
10. SYNC button
11. A/C display
12. 3
rd
row air conditioning ON/OFF button*
* if equipped
✽✽
NOTICE
Operating the blower when the ignition
switch is in the ACC position could cause
the battery to discharge. Only operate
the blower when the ignition switch is in
the ON position with the engine running.
■■
Front climate control (Type B)
■■
Front climate control (Type A)
Features of your vehicle
1404
OUMA046234/OUMA046235/OUM044177
1. Driver`s temperature control knob
2. Air conditioning button
3. Blower OFF button
4. Front windshield defroster button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Fan speed control button
7. Mode selection button
8. Air intake control button
9. Passenger`s temperature control knob
10. SYNC button
11. Climate button
12. 3
rd
row air conditioning ON/OFF button*
13. 3
rd
row air conditioning fan speed control
knob*
* if equipped
■■
Front climate control (Type C)
■■
Front climate control (Type D)
■■
3
rd
row air conditioning control
4141
Features of your vehicle
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1. Press the AUTO button. The
modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by setting the tem-
perature.
2. Turn the temperature control knob
to the desired temperature.
✽✽
NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The ‘AUTO’
sign will illuminate on the infor-
mation display once again.)
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control switch
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
73°F (23°C).
OUMA044159
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
OUMA044162
Features of your vehicle
1424
✽✽
NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pressing
buttons or turning knob(s) other than
the AUTO button. In this case, the
system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons or knob(s)
selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the
“Manual climate control system”.
OUM044075
OUM044160
4143
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
OUM044161
Features of your vehicle
1444
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the thumb-
wheel (if equipped).
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by turning the knob to
the extreme right.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to
the extreme left.
When turning the knob, the tempera-
ture will increase or decrease by
1°F/0.5°C. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condi-
tioning will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the “SYNC” button to adjust
the driver and passenger side tem-
perature equally.
The passenger side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the driver side temperature
control knob. The driver and pas-
senger side temperature will be
adjusted equally.
• When the third row’s seat heater
button is turned ON, the third row’s
climate and fan speed setting will
automatically follow the first row
settings.
OUM044151
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
OUMA044163
OUMA044162
4145
Features of your vehicle
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
• Press the “SYNC” button again to
adjust the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
illumination of button turns off.
• Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control knob to adjust the driv-
er side temperature.
• Operate the passenger side tem-
perature control knob to adjust the
passenger side temperature.
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature
mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit
as follows:
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.
The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heat-
ing system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
■ Type B, D
■ Type A, C
OUMA044164
OUMA044165
■ Type A, C
■ Type B, D
Features of your vehicle
1464
✽✽
NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (with-
out air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
Sunroof inside air recirculation
(if equipped)
If the sunroof opens while the heater
or Air Conditioning system is operat-
ing, the outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically for ventilating
the car. Then, if you select the recir-
culated air position, the outside
(fresh) air will be selected automati-
cally after 3 minutes.
If you close the sunroof, the intake
mode will be changed to the previous
selected mode.
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by operating the fan
speed control button.
To change the fan speed, press ( )
the button for higher speed, or push
( ) the button for lower speed. To
turn the fan speed control off, press
the front blower OFF button.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OUMA044168
OUM044166L
OUM044191L
4147
Features of your vehicle
OFF mode
Press the front blower OFF button to
turn off the front air climate control
system. However, you can still oper-
ate the mode and air intake buttons
as long as the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
Climate information screen
selection (if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
3
rd
row air conditioning
(if equipped)
To turn on the third row air condition-
ing control system
OUMA044169
OUM044211L OUM044156
Features of your vehicle
1484
1.You can operate the third row air
conditioning system from the first
row control panel. Changing the front
row’s fan speed by pressing the con-
trol button will automatically change
the third row’s fan speed as well.
When the front row air conditioning
has been turned off and you want
to stop the A/C in the third row,
press the third row air conditioning
select button one more time. Then,
the third row’s A/C will also turn off.
2.The third row A/C system can be
separately controlled by the control
buttons in the third row. When the
A/C is ON or OFF, the third row A/C
control button in the front row will
turn ON or OFF, informing the front
passengers of the situation.
3.The fan speed of the third row air
conditioning can also be separate-
ly controlled by turning the fan
speed control knob.
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
4149
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position, set the mode
control to the MAX A/C position,
then set the fan speed control to
the highest speed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
CAUTION
• When using the air condition-
ing system, monitor the tem-
perature gauge closely while
driving up hills or in heavy
traffic when outside tempera-
tures are high. Air condition-
ing system operation may
cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan
but turn the air conditioning
system off if the temperature
gauge indicates engine over-
heating.
• When opening the windows in
humid weather air condition-
ing may create water droplets
inside the vehicle. Since
excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical
equipment, air conditioning
should only be used with the
windows closed.
Features of your vehicle
1504
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the cli-
mate control air filter replaced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Replace the filter every 15,000
miles or once a year.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized Kia
dealer.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
4151
Features of your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air con-
ditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrig-
erant label in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Each symbol and specification on
the air conditioning refrigerant label
is represented below :
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail on
the location of air conditioning refrig-
erant label.
WARNING
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle's air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pres-
sure. If proper service proce-
dures are not followed an explo-
sion may result. To reduce the
risk of serious injury or death,
the air conditioning system in
your vehicle should only be
serviced by trained and certi-
fied technicians.
CAUTION
It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
erant is used, otherwise damage
to the vehicle may occur. To pre-
vent damage, the air conditioning
system in your vehicle should
only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.
OXM063009
■ Example
Features of your vehicle
1524
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
tion.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and the
windshield could cause the
outer surface of the windshield
to fog up, causing loss of visi-
bility. In this case, set the mode
selection to the position
and fan speed control to the
lower speed.
OUMA044170
4153
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected automat-
ically.
If the air conditioning is not selected
automatically press the correspon-
ding button manually.
Automatic climate control
system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the correspon-
ding button manually. If the posi-
tion is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
OUMA044172
OUMA044171
Features of your vehicle
1544
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically and the
air conditioning will turn on
according to the detected ambient
temperature.
Defogging logic
To reduce the possibility of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning is con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return to the
defogging logic, do the following.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Turn the fan speed control knob to
the OFF (0) position.
3. Turn the mode selection knob to
the defrost position ( ).
4. Push the air intake control button
( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-
onds.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OUMA044173 OUMA044403
4155
Features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Select the defroster position press-
ing the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The recirculation indicator blinks 3
times with 0.5 second of interval. It
indicates that the defogging logic is
canceled or returned to the pro-
grammed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Auto defogging system
(if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the probabil-
ity of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The auto defogging system operates
when the heater or air conditioning is
on.
OUMA044404
OUMA044405
Features of your vehicle
1564
This indicator illuminates
when the auto defogging
system senses the mois-
ture on the inside of the
windshield and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle,
higher steps operate as follow. For
example if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 1
Outside air position, it tries to defog
again at step 2 Blowing air toward
the windshield.
Step 1 : Outside air position
Step 2 :
Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
Step 5 : Maximizing the air condi-
tioning
To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging
System
Press the front windshield defroster
button for 3 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
When the Auto Defogging System is
canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink
3 times and the ADS OFF will be dis-
played on the climate control infor-
mation screen.
When the Auto Defogging System is
reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6
times without a signal.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the A/C off or recirculated air
position is manually selected while
the auto defogging system is on, the
auto defogging indicator will blink 3
times to give notice that manual
operation is canceled.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the pas-
senger side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts could
occur and may not be covered by
your vehicle warranty.
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the clean air function turns
on automatically.
Also, the clean air function turns off
automatically, when the ignition
switch turns to the OFF position.
CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED)
OUM044174L
4157
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or passengers.
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
• Always keep the storage compart-
ment covers closed while driving.
Do not attempt to place so many
items in the storage compartment
that the storage compartment
cover can not close securely.
Center console storage
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with a master key. (if
equipped)
To open the glove box, push the but-
ton and the glove box will automati-
cally open. Close the glove box after
use.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store, propane cylinders
or other flammable/explosive
materials in the vehicle. These
items may catch fire and/or
explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
OUM044077OUM044076
Features of your vehicle
1584
✽✽
NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in
the warm or hot position, warm or
hot air will flow into the glove box.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out.
To close the sunglass holder push it up.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
OUM044078
WARNING - Sunglass
holder
Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass
holder. Heavier objects can be
thrown from the holder in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident, possibly injuring the
passengers.
4159
Features of your vehicle
Luggage box
You can place a first aid kit, a reflec-
tor triangle, tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
Grasp the handle on the edge of the
cover and lift it.
OUM044079
OUM044181
■ Type A
■ Type B (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
1604
Cup holder
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING - Hot liquids
Do not place uncovered cups
with hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle.
OUMA054211
OUM044240L
OUM044242L
OUM044241L
■ Front
Type A
■ Front
Type B
■ Center (if equipped)
■ Rear (if equipped)
Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.
CAUTION
When cleaning spilled liquids,
do not dry the cup holder at
high temperature. This may
damage the cup holder.
4161
Features of your vehicle
Bottle holder
Bottles may be placed in the holder.
✽✽
NOTICE
Only bottles should be placed in the
holder labeled "Bottles Only."
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the front seats during cold weather.
With the ignition switch in the ON
position, push either of the switches
to warm the driver's seat or the front
passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the "OFF" position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the temperature setting of the seat
will change as follows :
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is turned on.
✽✽
NOTICE
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatical-
ly depending on the seat tempera-
ture.
OUM044243L
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
OUMA047175
OUM044096
■ Front seat
■ Rear seat
Features of your vehicle
1624
Seat cooler (Air ventilation seat)
(if equipped)
The temperature setting of the seat
changes according to the switch
position.
• If you want to cool your seat cush-
ion, press the switch (blue color).
• Each time you press the button,
the airflow will change as follows:
• The seat warmer (with air ventila-
tion) defaults to the OFF position
whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
OUMA047176
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
WARNING - Seat heater
burns
The seat warmer may cause
burns, even at low tempera-
tures, if used over a long period
of time. Never allow passengers
who may not be able to take
care of themselves to be
exposed to the risk of seat
heater burns.These include:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
CAUTION - Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those
things may damage the air
ventilation seat.
• Be careful not to spill liquid
such as water or beverages on
the seat. If you spill some liquid,
wipe the seat with a dry towel.
Before using the air ventilation
seat, dry the seat completely.
4163
Features of your vehicle
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win-
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
* The actual sunvisor lamp in the vehi-
cle may differ from the illustration.
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to pro-
vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
CAUTION - Vanity mirror
lamp
If you use the vanity mirror lamp,
turn off the lamp before return-
ing the sunvisor to its original
position, otherwise it could
result in battery discharge and
possible sunvisor damage.
OUM044084
OUM044085L
■ Front
■ 2nd row (if equipped)
OHG040168
Features of your vehicle
1644
• Use the power outlet only when the
engine is running and remove the
accessory plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged peri-
ods of time with the engine off could
cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric
capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater
to the lowest operating level when
using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when
plugged into a vehicle’s power out-
let. These devices may cause
excessive audio static and malfunc-
tions in other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will go.
If good contact is not made, the
plug may overheat and the fuse
may open.
• Plug in battery equipped electri-
cal/electronic devices with reverse
current protection. The current
from the battery may flow into the
vehicle’s electrical / electronic sys-
tem and cause system malfunc-
tion.
AC inverter (if equipped)
The AC inverter supplies 115V/150W
electric power to operate electric
accessories or equipment.
WARNING - Electric shock
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pen, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get an elec-
tric shock.
OUMA044179
OUMA046098
4165
Features of your vehicle
If you wish to use the AC inverter,
press the AC inverter button while
the engine is running. The light on
the AC inverter button will illuminate.
If you press the AC inverter button
again, the AC inverter will be deacti-
vated and the light on the AC invert-
er button will turn off.
✽✽
NOTICE
After pressing the AC inverter but-
ton ON, the indicator lamp illumina-
tion will be delayed, while the sys-
tem conducts a self-check.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Rated voltage : AC 115V
• Maximum electric power : 150W
• In order to avoid an electrical sys-
tem failure, electric shock, etc., be
sure to read owner's manual
before use.
• Be sure to close the cover except
for when in use.
• To prevent the battery from being dis-
charged, do not use the AC inverter
while the engine is not running.
• When not using the AC inverter,
make sure to turn off the AC inverter
(the indicator on the button does not
illuminate) and close the AC inverter
cover.
• After using an electric accessory or
equipment, pull the plug out. Leaving
the accessory or equipment plugged
in for a long time may cause battery
discharge.
• Do not use an electric accessory or
equipment the power consumption of
which is greater than 150W (115V).
• When the AC inverter input voltage is
less than 11.3V , the LED light will
blink and automatically turn off the
power.
AC inverter will operate as normal
when the voltage is increased.
• When the AC inverter input voltage
is less than 10.7V, the LED light
and power will turn off. The AC
inverter will operate as normal
when the voltage is increased after
pressing AC inverter button again.
OUMA046410
Features of your vehicle
1664
• While the power consumption of
some electrical devices/appliances
may be within the AC inverter’s
electric power range, it may mal-
function in below cases.
- If the device/appliance requires
high electric power for initial start
up
- If the device/appliance processes
precise/very accurate data
- If the device/appliance requires
very stable supply of electricity
USB charger (if equipped)
The USB charger is designed to
recharge batteries of small size elec-
trical devices using a USB cable.The
electrical devices can be recharged
when the Engine Start/Stop button is
in ACC/ON/START position.
The battery charging state may be
monitored on the electrical device.
Disconnect the USB cable from the
USB port after use.
• Some devices are not supported
for fast charging but will be
charged with normal speed.
• Use the USB charger when the
engine is running to prevent bat-
tery discharge.
• Only devices that fit the USB port
can be used.
• The USB charger can be used only
for battery charging purposes.
• Battery chargers cannot be
charged.
CAUTION - Electric acces-
sory devices
• Do not use broken electric
accessories which may dam-
age the AC inverter and elec-
trical systems of the vehicle.
• Do not use two or more electric
accessories at the same time. It
may cause damage to the elec-
trical systems of the vehicle.
OUMA044406
OUM044178L
■ Front
■ Rear
4167
Features of your vehicle
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
❈ This actual feature may differ from the illus-
tration.
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
Floor mat anchor (s)
(if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front
floor carpet, make sure it attaches to
the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehi-
cle. This keeps the floor mat from
sliding forward.
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat should
be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side floor
mat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floor mat in place.
To avoid any interference with pedal
operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floor mat designed for use in
your vehicle be installed.
OUM044086
CAUTION - Hanging
clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
OXM043309
Features of your vehicle
1684
Side curtain (if equipped)
To use the side curtain:
1. Lift the curtain by the handle (1).
2. Hang the curtain on the hooks on
both sides of the handle.
To avoid injury or damage to the side
curtain and door moldings, lower
side curtain by the handle all the way
back to the stowed position. Do not
release handle after disengaging
from the hooks on the door.
Luggage net holder
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
If necessary, we recommend that
you contact an authorized Kia dealer.
OUM044087
OUM044088
OUM044089
■ Type A
■ Type B
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the vehi-
cle, care should be taken when
carrying fragile or bulky objects
in the luggage compartment.
WARNING - Luggage net
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-
gage net when the strap has vis-
ible signs of wear or damage.
4169
Features of your vehicle
EXTERIOR FEATURES
Roof rack (if equipped)
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-
roof, be sure not to position cargo
onto the roof rack in such a way that
it could interfere with sunroof oper-
ation.
• The following specification is the
maximum weight that can be
loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly as
possible on the roof rack and
secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight limit
on the roof rack may damage your
vehicle.
• Always drive slowly and turn corners
carefully when carrying items on the
roof rack. Severe wind updrafts,
caused by passing vehicles or natu-
ral causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items loaded on
the roof rack. This is especially true
when carrying large, flat items such
as wood panels or mattresses. This
could cause the items to fall off the
roof rack and cause damage to your
vehicle or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of cargo
while driving, check frequently
before or while driving to make
sure the items on the roof rack are
securely fastened.
OUM044095
CAUTION - Loading Roof
Rack
• When carrying large objects
on the roof rack, make sure
they do not exceed the overall
roof length or width.
• When you are carrying cargo
on the roof rack, do not operate
the sunroof (if equipped).
WARNING - Driving with
roof load
Always drive slow and turn cor-
ners carefully when carrying
items on the roof rack.The vehi-
cle center of gravity will be
higher when items are loaded
onto the roof rack.
ROOF 220 lbs. (100 kg)
RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED
Features of your vehicle
1704
If you install aftermarket HID head
lamps, your vehicle’s audio and elec-
tronic devices may malfunction.
Antenna
Pole antenna
Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to
receive AM or/and FM broadcast sig-
nals.
This antenna pole is removable. To
remove the roof antenna pole, turn it
counterclockwise. To install the roof
antenna pole, turn it clockwise.
Shark fin antenna
The shark fin antenna will receive the
AM, FM broadcast signals and
transmit data.
• When reinstalling your roof anten-
na, it is important that it is fully
tightened and adjusted to the
upright position to ensure proper
reception.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
AUDIO SYSTEM
CAUTION - Antenna
Before entering a place with a
low height clearance or a car
wash, remove the antenna pole
by rotating it counterclockwise.
If not, the antenna may be dam-
aged.
OUM044339L/OANNMM2901
■ Pole Type ■ Shark fin type
4171
Features of your vehicle
Steering wheel remote con-
troller
(1) VOLUME
Used to control volume.
(2) SEEK
When pressed shortly (under 0.8
seconds).
- FM, AM mode : Searches broad-
cast frequencies saved to presets.
- CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio mode : Changes the track, file.
When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds).
- FM, AM mode : Automatically
searches broadcast frequencies
and channels.
- CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode :
Rewinds or fast forwards the track
or file.
(3) MUTE
Mutes audio volume.
(4) MODE
Each time this key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1,
FM2, AM, CD, USB(iPod), AUX, My
Music, BT Audio.
If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding
modes will be disabled.
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds) to turn the audio system on/off.
When power is off, press the key to
turn power back on.
(5) (if equipped)
When pressed shortly.
- When pressed in the phone screen,
displays call history screen.
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call.
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call.
- When pressed while another
incoming call is waiting, switches to
waiting call (Call Waiting).
When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
onds).
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call.
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call, switches call back to mobile
phone (Private).
- When pressed while calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected).
OUMA046409
Features of your vehicle
1724
(6) (if equipped)
Ends phone call.
(7) (if equipped)
When pressed shortly.
- Starts voice recognition.
- When selected during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and con-
verts to voice command waiting
state.
When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
onds).
- Ends voice recognition.
❈ The Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Kia is
under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A compatible
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Aux, USB port
If your vehicle has an AUX and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port, you
can use the AUX port to connect
audio devices and the USB port to
plug in a USB device or iPod
®.
✽✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
* iPod
®
is a Registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod
®
mobile digital
device sold separately. Connectivity
may require use of the Kia acces-
sory cable.
OUM044044L
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle con-
trol that may lead to an acci-
dent, severe personal injury,
and death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a
vehicle or which are not permis-
sible by law should never be
used during operation of the
vehicle.
4173
Features of your vehicle
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-
cle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long distance,low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.
JBM002
AM reception
JBM001
FM reception
Features of your vehicle
1744
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, moun-
tains, and obstructions. This can
lead to undesirable or unpleasant lis-
tening conditions which might lead
you to believe a problem exists with
your radio. The following conditions
are normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:
• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the
signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs,
we suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
nal weakens, another more power-
ful signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM005JBM004
4175
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-
way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possi-
ble.
When using a communication sys-
tem such as a cellular phone or a
radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa-
rate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehi-
cle's electrical system and adversely
affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING - Cell phone
use
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone.
WARNING - Driver
Distraction
• Do not stare at the screen
while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention
of traffic conditions and
increase the likelihood of
accidents. Use the phone fea-
ture after parking the vehicle.
WARNING - Audio System
Do not disassemble, assemble,
or modify the audio system.
Such acts could result in fire or
electric shock.
WARNING - Antenna
Do not touch the antenna dur-
ing thunder or lightening as
such acts may lead to lightning
induced electric shock.
CAUTION
Refrain from use if the screen is
blank or no sound can be heard
as these signs may indicate
product malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
1764
• Adjust the volume to levels that
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle. Driving
in a state where external sounds
cannot be heard may lead to acci-
dents.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sud-
den output of extreme volume
upon turning the device on could
lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable levels
before turning off the device.)
• Turn on the car ignition before
using the audio system. Do not
operate the audio system for long
periods of time with the ignition
turned off; such operations may lead
to battery discharge.
• In case of product malfunction,
please contact your place of pur-
chase or After Service center.
• Placing the audio system within an
electromagnetic environment may
result in noise interference.
CAUTION
• Do not subject the device to
severe shock or impact. Direct
pressure onto the front side of
the monitor may cause damage
to the LCD or touch screen.
• When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the
audio system and use a dry
and smooth cloth. Never use
tough materials, chemical
cloths, or solvents (alcohol,
benzene, thinners, etc.) as
such materials may damage
the device panel or cause
color/quality deterioration
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. Spilling
beverages may lead to system
malfunction.
• Prevent caustic solutions such
as perfume and cosmetic oil
from contacting the dashboard
because they may cause dam-
age or discoloration.
4177
Features of your vehicle
USING THE USB DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not con-
nected when starting up the vehi-
cle. Connect the device after start-
ing up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or turned
off while the external USB device is
connected, the external USB
device may not work.
• The System may not play unau-
thenticated MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electrici-
ty when connecting or disconnect-
ing the external USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of the
external USB device, the connect-
ed external USB device can be
unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recog-
nized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recog-
nizable.
• Make sure the USB connection ter-
minal does not come in contact
with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or dis-
connect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting
a USB device.
• If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB
mode, the external USB device
can be damaged or may malfunc-
tion. Therefore, disconnect the
external USB device when the
audio is turned off or in another
mode. (e.g, Radio)
• Depending on the type and capac-
ity of the external USB device or
the type of the files stored in the
device, there is a difference in the
time for recognition the device.
• Do not use the USB device for pur-
poses other than playing music
files.
• Playing videos through the USB is
not supported.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
1784
(Continued)
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal
of the vehicle.
• If the USB device is divided by log-
ical drives, only the music files on
the highest-priority drive are recog-
nized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Charging through the USB may not
be supported in some mobile
devices.
• USB HDD or USB types liable to
connection failures due to vehicle
vibrations are not supported. (i-stick
type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, micro SD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM (DIGI-
TAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are
not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
• Please avoid using
USB memory products
which can be used as
key chains or cellular
phone accessories as they could
cause damage to the USB jack.
Please make certain only to use
plug type connector products.
4179
Features of your vehicle
USING iPod
®
DEVICE
iPhone
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple inc.
• Some iPod
®
models may not sup-
port communication protocol and
files may not play properly.
Supported iPod
®
models:
- iPhone
®
3GS/4 or latest model
- iPod
®
touch 1st~4th generation
- iPod
®
nano 1st~6th generation
- iPod
®
classic
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod
®
can be different
from the order searched in the
audio system.
• If the iPod
®
is disabled due to its
own malfunction, reset the iPod
®
.
(Reset: Refer to iPod
®
manual)
• An iPod
®
may not operate normally
on low battery.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
devices, such as the
iPhone
®
, can be connected
through the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology interface. The device
must have audio
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology capability
(such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology ).
The device can play, but it will not
be controlled by the audio system.
• To use iPod
®
features within the
audio mode, use the cable provid-
ed upon purchasing an iPod
®
device.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the char-
acteristics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to
both the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology and USB, only iPod
®
mode will be supported during
Bluetooth
®
Audio Streaming.To use
Bluetooth
®
Audio Streaming, dis-
connect iPod
®
cable with iPhone
®
.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When connecting iPod
®
with the
iPod
®
Power Cable, insert the con-
nector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted complete-
ly, communications between iPod
®
and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod
®
and the audio system,
the sound effects of both devices
will overlap and might reduce or
distort the quality of the sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod
®
when adjust-
ing the audio system’s volume, and
turn off the equalizer of the audio
system when using the equalizer of
an iPod
®
.
• When not using iPod
®
with car
audio, detach the iPod
®
cable from
iPod
®
. Otherwise, iPod
®
may remain
in accessory mode, and may not
work properly.
Features of your vehicle
1804
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology(if equipped)
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth
®
SIG, lnc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
A Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Before Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree
What is Bluetooth
®
?
• Bluetooth
®
refers to a short-dis-
tance wireless networking technolo-
gy which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz
frequency to connect various
devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth
®
phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and auto-
motive environments, Bluetooth
®
allows data to be transmitted at high
speeds without having to use a con-
nector cable.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to
conveniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth
®
mobile phones through
the audio system.
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
To learn more about mobile device
compatibility, visit http:// www.kia.
com/us/en/content/owners/blue-
tooth.
Precautions for Safe Driving
• Bluetooth
®
Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice
safe driving. Connecting the head
unit with a Bluetooth
®
phone allows
the user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using Bluetooth
®
, carefully
read the contents of this user’s
manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driving
practices and result in accidents.
Refrain from excessive operations
while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driv-
ing, view the screen only for short
periods of time.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle.
4181
Features of your vehicle
When connecting a Bluetooth
®
Phone
• Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to
see that the mobile phone sup-
ports Bluetooth
®
features.
• Even if the phone supports Bluetooth
®
,
the phone will not be found during
device searches if the phone has
been set to hidden state or the
Bluetooth
®
power is turned off.
Disable the hidden state or turn on
the Bluetooth
®
power prior to
searching/connecting with the Head
unit.
• If you do not want an automatic con-
nection with your Bluetooth
®
device,
turn off the Bluetooth
®
feature with-
in your mobile phone.
• The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile
phone.
• Bluetooth
®
connection may become
intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps
to try again.
1.Within the mobile phone, turn
the Bluetooth
®
function off/on
and try again.
2.Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3.Completely remove the mobile
phone battery (if possible),
reboot, and then try again.
4.Reboot the audio system and try
again.
5.Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again.
Features of your vehicle
1824
Voice Recognition
(if equipped)
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed
within the user's manual are sup-
ported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
key terminate voice recogni-
tion mode.
• For optimal voice recognition per-
formance, position your head
below the microphone above the
driver’s seat and maintain proper
position when speaking voice com-
mands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the blower AC/heater is set
to high
- When entering and passing through
tunnels
(Continued)
(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is con-
nected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some time to convert the
phone book data into voice informa-
tion. During this time, voice recogni-
tion may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands
naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
mal conversation.
4183
Features of your vehicle
Standard Audio System
Features of your vehicle
1844
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit
(1) (EJECT)
Ejects the disc.
(2)
Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1
➟
FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(3)
Changes to CD, USB(iPod
®
), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
[Mode Pop up] is turned .
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys ~ to select the
desired mode.
(4)
Operates Phone Screen
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is dis-
played.
(5) POWER/VOL knob
Power : Turns power On/Off by
pressing the knob
Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
(6) ,
Radio Mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music modes
-
Shortly press the key (under 0.8 sec-
onds): Moves to next or previous song
(file)
-
Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec-
onds): Rewinds or fast-forwards the
current song.
BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
previous song(file)
❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
TRACK
SEEK
PHONE
51
On
MEDIA
61
On
RADIO
4185
Features of your vehicle
(7)
It sets the screen Off
➟ Screen On ➟
Screen Off
❈ Audio operation is maintained and
only the screen will be turned Off.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
(8)
Radio Mode
- Shortly press the key : Previews
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each.
- Press and hold the key (over 0.8
seconds): Previews the broadcasts
saved in Preset ~ for 5
seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency.
❈ SAT Radio does not support the
Preset scan feature.
CD, USB, My Music mode
- Shortly press the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each song
(file) for 10 seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
song (file).
(9)
Moves to the Display, Sound, Clock,
Phone, System setting modes.
(10)
Displays menus for the current mode.
❈ iPod
®
List : Move to parent category
(11) TUNE knob
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
turning the knob left/right.
CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode:
Searches songs (files) by turning the
knob left/right.
❈ When the desired song is dis-
played, press the knob to play the
song.
Moves focus in all selection menus
and selects menus.
(12) ,
Radio Mode
- SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search
MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search
(13) ~ (Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
CD, USB, iPod
®
, My Music mode
- : Repeat
- : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
2
RDM
1
RPT
61
FOLDER
CAT
MENU
SETUP
CLOCK
SCAN
SCAN
61
SCAN
DISP
Features of your vehicle
1864
SETUP
Display Settings
Press the key Select
[Display] through TUNE knob or
key Select menu through
TUNE knob
Mode Pop up
[Mode Pop up] Changes /
selection mode
• During On state, press the
or key to display the mode
change pop up screen.
Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
MEDIA
RADIO
OffOn
1
RPT
SETUP
CLOCK
4187
Features of your vehicle
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the key Select [Sound]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Tone
This menu allows you to set the
Bass, Middle, Treble.
Select [Tone] Select menu through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the
sound tone.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Position
This menu allows you to set the
Fader, Balance.
Select [Position] Select menu
through
TUNE knob
Tur n
TUNE knob
left/right to set
• Fader, Balance : Selects the sound
fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈ Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
Speed Dependent Volume Control
This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
[Off/On] of
TUNE
knob
Voice Recognition Volume
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
volume of
TUNE
knob
2
RDM
SETUP
CLOCK
Features of your vehicle
1884
CLOCK SETTINGS
Press the key Select [Clock]
through TUNE knob or key
Select menu through TUNE knob
Clock Settings
This menu is used to set the time.
Select [Clock Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to set the [hour] and press
the tune knob to set the [minute]
and [AM/PM].
Calendar Settings
This menu is used to set the date.
Select [Calendar Settings] Set through
TUNE knob Press TUNE knob
❈ Adjust the number currently in
focus to make the settings and
press the tune knob to move to
the next setting.
Time Format
This function is used to set the 12/24
hour time format of the audio sys-
tem.
Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr /
24Hr through TUNE knob.
Clock Display when Power is OFF
Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off)] Set
/
through
TUNE
knob
• : Displays time/date on screen
• : Turn off.
Off
On
OffOn
3
SETUP
CLOCK
WARNING - Clock Setting
Distraction
Do not adjust the clock while
driving. You may lose your
steering control and cause
severe personal injury or acci-
dents.
4189
Features of your vehicle
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Press the key Select
[System] Select menu through
TUNE knob
Memory Information
Displays currently used memory and
total system memory.
Select [Memory Information] OK
The currently used memory is dis-
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side.
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal
and Expert modes.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set
through
TUNE
knob
• On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
• Off : This mode is for expert users
and omits some information during
voice command operation. (When
using Expert mode, guidance
instructions can be heard through
the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language]
Set through TUNE knob
❈ The system will reboot after the
language is changed.
❈ Language support by region
- English, Francais, Espanol
SETUP
CLOCK
Features of your vehicle
1904
RADIO : FM, AM or SiriusXM
SEEK
Press the , key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Automatically searches
for the next station.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): While holding the key,
frequency changes without stop-
ping. When the key is released,
automatically searches for the next
frequency from that point.
Preset SEEK
Press the ~ key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
sound a BEEP.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): The broadcast frequency
increases and previews each
broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
scanning all frequencies, returns
and plays the current broadcast fre-
quency.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Previews the broad-
casts saved in Preset ~
for 5 seconds each.
Selecting through manual
search
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
adjust the frequency.
61
SCAN
61
61
TRACK
SEEK
4191
Features of your vehicle
MENU
Within key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to ~ keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
61
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
Features of your vehicle
1924
SiriusXM
®
Satellite Radio
information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-
month trial subscription to the Sirius
Select package. You’ll get over 140
channels, including commercial-free
music, plus all your favorite sports,
exclusive talk, entertainment, and a
selection of premium programming.For
more information and a complete list of
SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com
in the United States, siriusxm.ca in
Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-
7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an unob-
structed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-
up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the anten-
na as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway over-
passes, parking garages, dense
tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio serv-
ice:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts
music, sports, news and entertain-
ment programming to radio receivers,
which are available for installation in
motor vehicles or factory installed, as
well as for the home, portable and
wireless devices, and through an
Internet connection on a personal
computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a fac-
tory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio
system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the vehi-
cle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet
using any computer connected to
the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatical-
ly renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous USA, DC and PR
(with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm. ca. All fees and program-
ming subject to change. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
4193
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM RADIO
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-
month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the
key, and tune to channel
zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
SEEK
Press the key
,
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Select previous or next
channel.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Continuously move
to previous or next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
SCAN
Press the key
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Previews each broad-
cast for 5 seconds each
❈ Press the key again to
continue listening to the current
frequency
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Category
Press the , key Set
through the
TUNE
knob
• The display will indicate the catego-
ry menus, highlight the category
that the current channel belongs to.
• In the Category List Mode, press
the
,
key to navi-
gate category list.
• Press the tune knob to select the
lowest channel in the highlighted
category.
❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
FOLDER
CAT
FOLDER
CAT
SCAN
SCANRADIO
TRACK
SEEK
RADIO
RADIO
Features of your vehicle
1944
Preset
Press the key ~
• Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8
seconds): Plays the frequency
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding
the desired key from ~
will save the current broadcast to
the selected key and sound a
BEEP.
✽✽
Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is bro-
ken or unplugged. Please consult
with your Kia dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
Tune
• Rotate TUNE knob : Changes
the channel number or scrolls cat-
egory list.
• Press TUNE knob : Selects the
menu.
Menu
Select category menu through the
TUNE knob Press the
key Select [ Info] through the
TUNE knob or key
Info (Information)
Displays the Artist/Song info of the
current song.
1
RPT
MENU
61
61RADIO
4195
Features of your vehicle
BASIC METHOD OF USE :
Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB /
iPod
®
/ My Music
Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB(iPod
®
) ➟
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
The folder/file name is displayed on
the screen.
<Audio CD>
<MP3 CD>
<USB>
<My Music>
❈ The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted.
❈ The USB music is automatically
played when a USB is connected.
Repeat
While song (file) is playing
(RPT) key
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod
®
, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
• To repeat one song (press the key)
: Repeats the current song.
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
screen
• To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
Random
While song (file) is playing
(RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
2
RDM
1
RPT
1
RPT
MEDIA
Features of your vehicle
1964
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on
screen
• Folder Random (press the key) :
Plays all files within the current fold-
er in random order.
iPod
®
mode: ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (press the key) : Plays
all files in random order.
MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays
all files in random order.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off repeat.
Changing Song/File
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
current song from the beginning.
❈ If the key is pressed again
within 2 seconds, the previous
song is played.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song.
While song (file) is playing key
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the
next song.
• Pressing and holding the key (over
0.8 seconds): Fast forwards the
song.
Scan
While song (file) is playing
key
• Shortly pressing the key : Scans all
songs from the next song for 10
seconds each.
❈ Press the key again to turn
off.
❈ The SCAN function is not support-
ed in iPod
®
mode.
Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
Mode
While file is playing (Folder
Up) key
• Searches the next folder.
While file is playing (Folder
Down) key
• Searches the parent folder.
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
the TUNE knob, the first file
within the selected folder will be
played.
❈ In iPod
®
mode, moves to the
Parent Folder.
Searching Songs (File)
• Turning TUNE knob : Searches
for songs (files)
• Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
selected song (file).
FOLDER
CAT
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
TRACK
2
RDM
4197
Features of your vehicle
MENU : Audio CD
Press the Audio CD mode
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key to randomly play songs within
the current CD.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
MENU : MP3 CD / USB
Press the MP3 CD/USB mode
key to set the Repeat, Folder
Random, Folder Repeat, All
Random, Information, and Copy fea-
tures.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
Features of your vehicle
1984
Folder Random
Press the key Set [ F.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to randomly play songs within the
current folder.
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off.
Folder Repeat
Press the key Set [ F.RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat songs within the cur-
rent folder.
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off.
All Random
Press the key Set [ A.RDM]
through the
TUNE
knob or key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD/USB.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to display information of the cur-
rent song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Copy
Press the key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
This is used to copy the current song
into My Music. You can play the
copied Music in My Music mode.
❈ If another key is pressed while
copying is in progress, a pop up
asking you whether to cancel
copying is displayed.
❈ If another media is connected or
inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
❈ Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
6
MENU
MENU
5
MENU
4
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
4199
Features of your vehicle
MENU : iPod
®
In iPod
®
mode, press the key
to set the Repeat, Random, Information
and Search features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the key Set [ Search]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays iPod
®
category list.
❈ Searching iPod
®
category is
key pressed, move to par-
ent category.
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2004
MENU : My Music Mode
In My Music mode, press the
key to set the Repeat, Random,
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features.
Repeat
Press the key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Repeats the currently playing song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
Random
Press the key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
Information
Press the key Set [ Info]
through the
TUNE
knob or
key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the key to turn off
info display.
Delete
Press the key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Deletes currently playing file
In the play screen, pressing delete
will delete the currently playing song.
Deletes file from list
➀ Select the file you wish to delete
by using the TUNE knob.
➁ Press the key and select
the delete menu to delete the
selected file.
Delete All
Press the key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or key.
Deletes all songs of My Music.
Delete Selection
Press the key Set [ Del.Sel]
through the TUNE knob or
key.
Songs within My Music are selected
and deleted.
➀ Select the songs you wish to
delete from the list.
6
MENU
5
MENU
MENU
4
MENU
MENU
3
MENU
2
RDM
MENU
1
RPT
MENU
MENU
4201
Features of your vehicle
➁ After selecting, press key
and select the delete menu.
My Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up
to 1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup.
AUX
AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the key to
change to AUX mode.
❈ AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
MEDIA
MENU
Features of your vehicle
2024
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
AUDIO
What is
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
?
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
allows devices to be connected in a
short distance, including hands-free
devices, stereo headsets, wireless
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology website at
www.Bluetooth.com
Before using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio
may not be supported depending on
the compatibility of your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• The Bluetooth
®
word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and
any use of such marks by Kia is
under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their
respective owners. A Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is required to
use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio can be used only when the
[Audio Streaming] of Phone is
turned .
On
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
4203
Features of your vehicle
Starting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio
• Press the key to change the
mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio.
• If BT Audio is selected,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
Using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio features
• Play / Stop
Press the TUNE knob to play and
pause the current song.
❈
The title / artist info may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
When it is not supported, no title or
artist will be displayed.
• Previous / Next song
Press or
to
play previ-
ous or next song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile
phones.
TRACK
SEEK
MEDIA
Features of your vehicle
2044
PHONE
Before using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone features
• In order to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone, you must first
pair and connect the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed.
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni-
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected. Even if
you are outside, the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone will be
automatically connected once you
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If
you do not want automatic
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone connection, set the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
power to OFF
Making a call using the
Steering-wheel mount controls
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
(1) key : Mutes the microphone
during a call when wheel
pressed.
(2)
,
key /scroll wheel : Raises or
lowers speaker volume.
(3) key : Activates voice recogni-
tion.
(4) key : Places and transfers
calls.
(5) key : Ends calls or cancels
functions.
• Check call history and making calls
- Shortly press (under 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
- The call history list will be dis-
played on the screen.
- Press the key again to con-
nect a call to the selected number.
• Redialing the most recently called
number
- Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds)
the key on the steering
remote controller.
- The most recently called number is
redialed.
❈ If call history does not exist, a
screen asking whether to down-
load call history is displayed. (The
download feature may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones)
-
+
4205
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology feature.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
2064
Pairing key / key on
the Steering Remote Controller
When No Devices have been Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Select [OK] button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.
1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered. Enter the passkey “0000”
to pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device with the car
audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
PHONE
PHONE
4207
Features of your vehicle
Some phones (i.e., iPhone
®
, Android
TM
and Blackberry
®
phones) may offer
an option to allow acceptance of all
future Bluetooth
®
connection
requests by default." and "Visit
http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/ow
ners/bluetooth for additional informa-
tion on pairing your Bluetooth
®
-
enabled mobile phone, and to view a
phone compatibility list.
• If
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the follow-
ing screen. Select [Pair] button to
pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2084
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Select TUNE knob
1. The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
features supported within the vehi-
cle are as follows. Some features
may not be supported depending
on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree
calls
- Operations during a call (Switch
to Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
-
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
-
Bluetooth
®
Audio Streaming
• Up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired
to the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be con-
nected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired
while a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is connected.
• Only
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Handsfree and
Bluetooth
®
audio related features
are supported.
• Bluetooth
®
related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio fea-
tures, such as a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology mobile phone
or a Bluetooth
®
audio device.
• If a connected
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of
communication range, turning the
device OFF, or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology communica-
tion error, corresponding
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are automatically
searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable
due to communication errors
between the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon reset-
ting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
SETUP
CLOCK
4209
Features of your vehicle
• After pairing is complete, a con-
tacts download request is sent
once to the mobile phone. Some
mobile phones may require confir-
mation upon receiving a download
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
select [Connect].
SETUP
CLOCK
Features of your vehicle
2104
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then select [Change
Priority] button from the Menu. The
selected device will be changed to
the highest priority.
• Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a pri-
ority phone.
SETUP
CLOCK
4211
Features of your vehicle
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
select [Disconnect] button.
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and select
[Delete] button.
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
ceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
CLOCK
Features of your vehicle
2124
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device connected, press
the key to display the Phone
menu screen.
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used
contacts can be saved for easy
access.
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
• If you select the [Call History] but-
ton but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks
to download call history data.
• If you select the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data
stored, a prompt is displayed which
asks to download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
To accept the call, press key on
the steering wheel while the call is
incoming.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
SETUP
CLOCK
4213
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
Favorites
Press the key Select
[Favorites]
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts can be saved as favorite.
• To save Favorite, contacts should
be downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not
be automatically updated if the
contact has been updated in the
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new
Favorite.
Call History
Press the key Select [Call
History]
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
• Call history may not be saved in the call
history list in some mobile phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID will
not be saved in the call history list.
• Calling through the call history is not
possible when there is no call history
stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone is not connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed
calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call
time information are not stored in Call
History.
PHONE PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2144
Contacts
Press the key Select
[Contacts]
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed.
NOTE:
Find a contact in alphabetical
order, press the key.
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are man-
aged separately for each paired
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con-
tacts each). Previously down-
loaded data is maintained even if
the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device has been dis-
connected. (However, the contacts
and call history saved to the phone
will be deleted if a paired phone is
deleted.)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth
®
streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the
status bar.
• It is not possible to begin down-
loading a contact list when the con-
tact download feature has been
turned off within the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device. In
addition, some devices may
require device authorization upon
attempting to download contacts. If
downloading does not normally
occur, check the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device set-
tings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature
may not be supported in some
mobile phones. For more informa-
tion of supported Bluetooth
®
devices and function support, refer
to your phone’s user manual.
MENU
PHONE
4215
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Setting
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
tion within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Phone List]
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section
within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
CLOCK
WARNING
Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
severe personal injury, and
death. The driver’s primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
use of any handheld devices,
other equipment, or vehicle sys-
tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
2164
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contact
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connect-
ed phone can be downloaded
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
• Upon downloading phone con-
tacts, the previous corresponding
data is deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
going volume level.
• While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
,
key.
TRACK
SEEK
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
CLOCK
4217
Features of your vehicle
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
• To turn
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology back on, go to
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
SETUP
CLOCK
SETUP
CLOCK
Features of your vehicle
2184
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel. Say a command
If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
say “(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
• For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruc-
tion and beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
“Home”)
2) Avoid using special characters or
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
3) Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
4) Spell words completely, no abbre-
viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
“Dr. Goodman”)
SETUP
CLOCK
4219
Features of your vehicle
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep tone will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
ENDING VOICE
RECOGNITION
While Voice Recognition is operating
Press and hold the key on the
steering remote controller
• While using voice command,
pressing any steering wheel con-
trol or a different key will end voice
command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, say “cancel” or
“end” to end voice command.
• When the system is waiting for a
voice command, press and hold
the key on the steering wheel
to end voice command.
Voice Recognition and Phone
Contact Tips:
The Kia Voice Recognition System
may have difficulty understanding
some accents or uncommon names.
When using Voice Recognition to place
a call, speak in a moderate tone, with
clear pronunciation.
To maximize the use of Voice Recognition,
consider these guidelines when storing
contacts:
• Use full names vs. short or single
syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
“Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
“Home”)
• Avoid using special characters or
hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
• Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
• Spell words completely, no abbre-
viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
“Dr. Goodman”)
Features of your vehicle
2204
Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
while guidance message is being stated
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a...
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Beep~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
(BEEP)
4221
Features of your vehicle
Voice Command List
• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections
•
When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
SAT1
➟
SAT2
➟
SAT3
➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
Features of your vehicle
2224
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
SIRIUS (Satellite) •
When listening to the SiriusXM
®
, maintains
the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
®
screen.
SIRIUS (Satellite)
Displays the selected SiriusXM
®
screen.
SIRIUS
Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM
®
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Mute Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~223
1~3
4223
Features of your vehicle
• FM/AM radio Commands: Commands available dur-
ing FM, AM radio operation.
• Satellite radio Commands: Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Command Function
Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
Features of your vehicle
2244
• Audio CD Commands: Commands available during
Audio CD operation.
• MP3 CD / USB Commands: Commands available
during USB and MP3 CD operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.
4225
Features of your vehicle
•iPod
®
Commands: Commands available during iPod
®
operation.
• My Music Commands: Commands available during
My Music operation.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Command Function
Random Randomly plays all saved files.
Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
Features of your vehicle
2264
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
•
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio Commands:
Commands available during
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone oper-
ation Command Operation
iPod
®
is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod
®
mobile digital device sold separately. The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under license.
SiriusXM services require a subscription sold sep-
arately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service after your trial, the
subscription plan you choose will automatically
renew thereafter and you will be charged according
to your chosen payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply.To cancel you must call
SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the 48 contiguous
USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro-
gramming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark of Google,
Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark of
Research In Motion Limited (RIM). All other marks,
channel names and logos are the property of their
respective owners. All rights reserved.
4227
Features of your vehicle
■■
CD Player
Features of your vehicle
2284
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS
AND FUNCTIONS
Audio Head Unit
1. (EJECT)
• Ejects the disc.
2.
• Converts to Radio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1,
FM2, AM, SAT1, SAT2, SAT3.
3.
• Converts to Media mode.
• Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod
®
), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio.
4.
• Converts to Phone mode
❈ When a phone is not connected,
the connection screen is displayed.
5. POWER/VOL knob
• Power : Press to turn power on/
off.
• Volume : Turn left/right to control
volume.
6.
• When pressed shortly(under 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : Plays previous/next
frequency.
- Media (CD /USB /iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : Changes the track,
Song(file)
• When pressed and held (Over 0.8
seconds)
- Radio mode : Continuously changes
the frequency. Upon release, plays
the current frequency.
- Media(CD /USB /iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : Rewinds or fast forwards
the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls
the call volume.
7.
• SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Search Folder
8. RESET
• Forced system termination and sys-
tem restart.
CAT
FOLDER
SEEK
TRACK
PHONE
MEDIA
RADIO
4229
Features of your vehicle
9.
• Turns the monitor displays on/off.
10.
• Shortly press the key(under 0.8
seconds) : Display time screen
• Press and hold the key(over 0.8
seconds) : Move to the time setting
mode
11.
• Radio mode : Previews all receiv-
able broadcasts for 5 seconds each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :
Previews each song (file) for 10
seconds each.
12.
• Converts to Setup mode.
13. TUNE knob
• Radio mode :Turn to change broad-
cast frequencies.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes : Turn to search
Tracks/channels/files.
SETUP
SCAN
CLOCK
DISP
Features of your vehicle
2304
Steering remote controller
❈ The actual features in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
1. MUTE
• Mutes the microphone during a call
when wheel pressed.
2. VOLUME
• Used to control volume.
3.
• When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice
prompt, stops the prompt and
converts to voice command wait-
ing state
• When pressed and held (over 0.8
seconds)
- Ends voice recognition
4. MODE
• Each time this key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3
➟ CD ➟ USB(iPod
®
) ➟ AUX ➟ My
Music ➟ BT Audio
• If the media is not connected or a
disc is not inserted, corresponding
modes will be disabled.
5. SEEK
• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 sec-
onds)
- Radio mode : Searches broadcast
frequencies saved to presets.
- Media(CD/ USB/ iPod
®
/ My Music/
BT Audio) modes : Changes the
track, file or chapter.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
onds)
- Radio mode, automatically search-
es broadcast frequencies and
channels
- Media(CD/USB/iPod
®
/My Music)
modes, rewinds or fast forwards
the track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be sup-
ported in some mobile phones.
4231
Features of your vehicle
6.
• When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone
screen, displays call history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen,
makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call
screen, answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting,
switches to waiting call (Call
Waiting)
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 sec-
onds)
- When pressed in the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
wait mode, redials the last call
- When pressed during a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Handsfree
call, switches call back to mobile
phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on the
mobile phone, switches call back
to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Operates only when
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected)
7.
• Ends phone call
Features of your vehicle
2324
RADIO MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays current operating mode.
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
3. Preset
Displays current preset number
~.
4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
5. A.Store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟
SAT1
➟
SAT2
➟
SAT3
If is turned on within
, then pressing the
key will display the Radio
P
op-up Mode screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
RADIO
Display
SETUP
Mode Pop up
RADIO
6
1
4233
Features of your vehicle
Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the key to play the
previous/next frequency.
Using TUNE
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.
Using Radio Mode
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the fre-
quency saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
✽✽
NOTICE
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the ~ preset
buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save
the current frequency to the selected
preset.
Auto Store
Press the button to auto-
matically save receivable frequen-
cies to Preset buttons.
Scan
Press the key to preview fre-
quencies with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5
seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored. While
Scan is operating, pressing the
key will cancel the scan
operation.
SCAN
SCAN
SCAN
A.Store
61
61
Preset
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2344
SiriusXM
®
Satellite Radio infor-
mation
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-
month trial subscription to the Sirius
Select package. You’ll get over 140
channels, including commercial-free
music, plus all your favorite sports,
exclusive talk, entertainment, and a
selection of premium programming.For
more information and a complete list
of SiriusXM channels, visit sir-
iusxm.com in the United States, sir-
iusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors:
To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio sys-
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your
reception.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:
SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broad-
casts music, sports, news and enter-
tainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or facto-
ry installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on a
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and other
select channels over the Internet
using any computer connected to
the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended sub-
scription terms, contact SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc.
If you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatical-
ly renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for com-
plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous USA, DC and PR
(with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.sir-
iusxm.ca. All fees and program-
ming subject to change. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.
4235
Features of your vehicle
SiriusXM RADIO MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode Display
Displays current operating mode.
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel num-
ber, channel name, artist and title
information.
3. Preset
Displays current playing preset
number ~ .
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.
5. Info
Displays detailed information about
the current broadcast.
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3-
month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140
channels of music, information, and
entertainment programming.
Activation
In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the
key, and tune to channel
zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.
RADIO
61
Features of your vehicle
2364
Using SEEK
Press the key to play the
previous/next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.
Using Tune
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
desired channel.
SCAN
Press the key to scan all
channels with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous-
ly played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the
key again will cancel the scan opera-
tion and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the cur-
rent category.
Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
key and press the TUNE
knob to select.
Channels for the selected category
are played.
✽✽
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the anten-
na or antenna cable is broken or
unplugged. Please consult with your
Kia dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it means
that the antenna is covered and that
the SiriusXM Satellite Radio signal is
not available. Ensure the antenna is
uncovered and has a clear view of the
sky.
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
4237
Features of your vehicle
Selecting Presets/Saving Presets
Press the button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.
Press the ~ buttons to play
the desired preset.
✽✽
NOTICE
While listening to a channel you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one
of the
~
preset buttons (over
0.8 seconds) to save the current chan-
nel to the selected preset.
✽✽
NOTICE - USING CDs
• This device has been man-
ufactured to be compatible
with software bearing the
following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,
benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc back
in its original case to prevent disc
scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damages
to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances
into the disc insert/eject slot.
Introducing foreign substances
could damage the device interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultane-
ously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and play-
ing times may occur depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method as
used by the user.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a soft
cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also result
in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not
properly operate depending on the
disc manufacturer, production
method and the record method as
used by the user. If problems persist,
try using a different CD as continued
use may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CD-RW
Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type
CDs may not function in the device.
DATA discs cannot be played.
(However, such discs may still oper-
ate but will do so abnormally.)
(Continued)
61
61
Preset
Features of your vehicle
2384
(Continued)
• Do not use abnormally shaped discs
(8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-shaped)
as such discs could lead to malfunc-
tions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 seconds,
the disc will automatically be re-
inserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure. (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
MEDIA MODE
Pressing the key will change
the operating mode in order of CD
➟
USB(iPod
®
)
➟
AUX
➟
My Music
➟
BT Audio.
If is turned on within
, then pressing the
key will display the Media
Mode Pop up screen.
Turn the TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The media Mode Pop up screen can
be displayed only when there are two
or more media modes turned on.
Title Icon
When a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology,
iPod
®
, USB, or AUX device is con-
nected or a CD is inserted, the cor-
responding mode icon will be dis-
played.
Icon Title
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
CD
iPod
®
USB
AUX
MEDIA
Display
SETUP
Mode Pop up
MEDIA
4239
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays current operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
3. Track Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent track.
4. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
5. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
6. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current track.
7. Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
Moves to the list screen.
Features of your vehicle
2404
Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Only genuine audio CDs are sup-
ported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track
information is included within the
audio CD.
Changing Tracks
Press the key to move to
the previous or next track.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
track has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current track from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
track has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous track.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.
Once you find the desired track,
press the TUNE knob to start
playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
track.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4241
Features of your vehicle
Audio CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat
and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current disc.
Shuffle
Press the button to play
tracks in shuffle order.
Press the button again to
turn the Shuffle feature off.
• Shuffle : Plays all tracks in shuffle
order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current track.
List
Press the button to display the
track list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.
List
Repeat
Shuffle
Shuffle
Info
Features of your vehicle
2424
MP3 CD MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays current operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat /Shuffle /Scan, displays
the currently operating function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file number.
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Shows detailed information about
the current file.
8. Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music
11. List
Moves to the list screen.
4243
Features of your vehicle
Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are numerous files and folders
within the disc, reading time could
take more than 10 seconds and the list
may not be displayed or song searches
may not operate. Once loading is com-
plete, try again.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 second will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
Searching Folders
Press the key to select and
search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
CAT
FOLDER
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2444
MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat,
Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is
set as the default display within
Display setup, the album/artist/file
information are displayed as
detailed file information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are dis-
played as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such infor-
mation is recorded within the MP3
file ID3 tag.
Shuffle
Press the button to play files
in shuffle order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Shuffle
Folder
➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle Folder : Plays all files with-
in the current folder in shuffle
order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle
order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat: Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder: Repeats all files
within the current Folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
Copy
Repeat
Shuffle
Info
4245
Features of your vehicle
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE USB
DEVICE
• Connect the USB device after turn-
ing on the engine. The USB device
may become damaged if it is already
connected when the ignition is
turned on.The USB device may not
operate properly if the car ignition is
turned on or off with the USB device
connected.
• Heed caution to static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting USB
devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the device may not properly
recognize the USB is in some states.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB devices
formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file for-
mats. This device does not recognize
files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be sup-
ported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB con-
nector with bodily parts or foreign
objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting
of USB devices within short periods
of time may result in product mal-
function.
• A strange noise may occur when dis-
connecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the audio
power turned off.
• The amount of time required to rec-
ognize the USB device may differ
depending on the type, size or file
formats stored in the USB. Such dif-
ferences in time are not indications
of malfunctions.
• The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not sup-
ported.
(Continued)
List
Features of your vehicle
2464
(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Such acts may lead
to worsened performance or dam-
age to the device.
• The device may not recognize the
USB device if separately pur-
chased USB hubs and extension
cables are being used. Connect the
USB directly with the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical
drives, only files saved to the root
drive can be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
to the USBs.
• The device may not operate nor-
mally if MP3 Players, cellular
phones, digital cameras, or other
electronic devices (USB devices
not recognized as portable disk
drives) are connected with the
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may
not work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory
type besides (Metal Cover Type) USB
Memory.
• The device may not support nor-
mal operation when using formats
such as HDD Type, CF, or SD
Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by con-
necting an Adaptor (SD Type or
CF Type) may not be properly rec-
ognized.
• The device may not operate prop-
erly when using USB HDDs or
USBs subject to connection fail-
ures caused by vehicle vibrations.
(e.g. i-stick type)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB
memory products that
can also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or
phone through various channels,
such as AUX/BT or Audio/ USB
mode may result in pop noises or
abnormal operation.
4247
Features of your vehicle
USB MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays current operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file number.
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
8. Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Copy
Copies the current file into My Music.
11. List
Moves to the list screen.
Features of your vehicle
2484
Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
Once a USB is connected, the mode
will automatically start and begin
playing a USB file.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Loading may require additional time
if there are many files and folders
within the USB and result in faulty
list display or file searching. Normal
operations will resume once loading
is complete.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memo-
ry type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
Changing Files
Press the keys to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
4249
Features of your vehicle
Searching Folders
Press the key to select and
search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected fold-
er will begin playing.
USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat,
Copy and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set as
the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file informa-
tion are displayed as detailed file
information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’ opti-
on is set as the default display, the
folder name/file name are displayed
as detailed file information.
•The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such informa-
tion are recorded within the MP3 file
ID3 tag.
Shuffle
Press the button to play files
in shuffle order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Shuffle
Folder
➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle Folder : Plays the files in the
current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle
order.
Shuffle
Info
CAT
FOLDER
Features of your vehicle
2504
Repeat
Press the button to repeat
the current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files within
the current folder.
Copying Files
Press the button to copy the
current file into My Music.
✽✽
NOTICE
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
Copy
Repeat
4251
Features of your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE
iPod
®
DEVICE
• iPod
®
is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod
®
while
operating the keys, you must use a
dedicated iPod
®
cable. (the cable
that is supplied when purchasing
iPod
®
/iPhone
®
products)
• If the iPod
®
is connected to the
vehicle while it is playing, a high
pitch sound could occur for
approximately 1-2 seconds imme-
diately after connecting. If possi-
ble, connect the iPod
®
to the vehi-
cle with the iPod
®
stopped/paused.
• During ACC ON state, connecting
the iPod
®
through the iPod
®
cable
will charge the iPod
®
through the
car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod
®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an exter-
nal device, such as the iPod
®
, and
the audio system are both active,
EQ effects could overlap and
cause sound deterioration and dis-
tortion. Whenever possible, turn
off the EQ feature within the
external device upon use by con-
necting with the audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod
®
or
AUX device is connected. When
such devices are not being used,
disconnect the device for storage.
• When the iPod
®
or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such cases,
disconnect the power connection
before use.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the char-
acteristics of your iPod
®
/iPhone
®
device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If your iPhone
®
is connected to
both the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology and USB, the sound
may not be properly played. In
your iPhone
®
, select the Dock con-
nector or Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology to change the sound
output (source).
• iPod
®
mode cannot be operated
when the iPod
®
cannot be recog-
nized due to versions that do not
support communication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod
®
Nano
devices, the iPod
®
may not be rec-
ognized when the battery level is
low. Please charge the iPod
®
for
use.
• Search/play orders shown within
the iPod
®
device may differ with
the orders shown within the audio
system.
• If the iPod
®
malfunctions due to an
iPod
®
device defect, reset the iPod
®
and try again. (To learn more, refer
to your iPod
®
manual)
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
2524
iPod
®
MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays current operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle, displays the cur-
rently operating function.
3. Song Index
Displays the current song/total num-
ber of songs.
4. Song Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent song.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
8. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
9. List
Moves to the list screen.
(Continued)
• Some iPod
®
products may not
sync with the System depending
on its version. If the Media is
removed before the Media is rec-
ognized, then the system may not
properly restore the previously
operated mode. (iPad
®
charging is
not supported.)
• Beside support 1M cable when
purchasing iPod/iPhone products,
Long Cable cannot be recognized.
4253
Features of your vehicle
Using iPod
®
Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod
®
Songs
Once an iPod
®
is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod
®
song.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
iPod
®
products with unsupported
communication protocols may not
properly operate in the audio system.
Changing Songs
Press the key to move to
the previous or next song.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
song has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current song from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
song has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod
®
product.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current
song.
Searching Categories
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
✽✽
NOTICE
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2544
Category Menu
Within the iPod
®
Category menu,
you will have access to the ,
and features.
1. : Displays the play screen
2. : Moves to the iPod
®
root cat-
egory screen
3. : Moves to the previous cate-
gory
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod
®
device.
iPod
®
Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Shuffle, Repeat and
List features.
Shuffle
Press the button to play
songs in shuffle order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Shuffle
All
➟ Off ➟ Shuffle All.
• Shuffle All : Plays all songs in shuffle
order.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song
List
Press the button to display the
Category Menu.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the TUNE knob to select
and play.
List
Repeat
Shuffle
Home
Home
4255
Features of your vehicle
AUX MODE
Using AUX Mode
Press the key Select
An external device can be connected
to play music.
Connecting an External Device
External audio players (Camcorders,
car VCR, etc.) can be played through
a dedicated cable.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is dis-
connected, the previous mode will be
restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when an
external audio player (camcorder,
car VCR, etc.) has been connected.
• The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not being
used, also remove the connector
jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing
the external device may output noise.
In such cases, disconnect the power
connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.
AUX
MEDIA
Features of your vehicle
2564
MY MUSIC MODE
Basic Mode Screen
1. Mode
Displays current operating mode.
2. Operation State
From Repeat/Shuffle/Scan, displays the
currently operating function.
3. File Index
Displays the current file/total number
of files.
4. File Info
Displays information about the cur-
rent file.
5. Play/Pause
Changes the play/pause state.
6. Play Time
Displays the current play time.
7. Info
Displays detailed information for the
current file.
8. Shuffle
Turns the Shuffle feature on/off.
9. Repeat
Turns the Repeat feature on/off.
10. Delete
Deletes the current file.
11. List
Moves to the list screen.
4257
Features of your vehicle
Using My Music Mode
Playing/Pausing My Music Files
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the button will be
disabled.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Pressing the key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the key before the
file has been playing for 1 second will
start the previous file.
Selecting from the List
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
key (over 0.8 seconds) to
rewind or fast-forward the current file.
Scan
Press the key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.
SCAN
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
SEEK
TRACK
My Music
Features of your vehicle
2584
My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat,
Delete and List features.
Info
Press the button to display
details about the current file.
✽✽
NOTICE
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information
is recorded within the MP3 file ID3
tag.
Shuffle
Press the button to play files
in shuffle order. Press the button
again to turn the Shuffle feature off.
Repeat
Press the button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
Deleting Files
Press the button to delete the
current file.
List
Press the button to display the
file list screen.
Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.
List
Delete
Repeat
Shuffle
Info
4259
Features of your vehicle
List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.
Press the button or individ-
ually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
button and button
will be enabled.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2) Select All : Selects all files
3) Unselect All : Deselects all select-
ed files
4) Delete : Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the button to
delete the selected files.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied more
than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go to
Memory InformationSystem
SETUP
Delete
Delete
Unselect All
Select All
Features of your vehicle
2604
✽✽
NOTICE - USING THE
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
Mode can be used only when a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone has been connected.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
Mode will not be available when con-
necting mobile phones that do not
support this feature.
• While Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Audio is playing, if the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone is con-
nected, then the music will also stop.
• Moving the Track up/down while play-
ing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
audio mode may result in pop noises
in some mobile phones.
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology stream-
ing audio may not be supported in some
mobile phones.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may not
automatically restart in some mobile
phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or mak-
ing an outgoing call while playing
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
may result in audio interference.
4261
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology AUDIO MODE
Using
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
Once a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device is connected, the mode will
automatically start.
While playing, press the button
to pause and press button to
play.
✽✽
NOTICE
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.
Changing Files
Press the key to move to
the previous or next file.
Setting Connection
If a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the key button to
display the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete fea-
tures from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology Audio
mode, pressing the play button once
may start playing the mode. Check to
see that music is playing from the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device
after converting to Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Audio Mode.
Phone
SETUP
SEEK
TRACK
Features of your vehicle
2624
Pairing a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of syn-
chronizing your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
feature.
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth
®
SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A Bluetooth
®
enabled cell phone is
required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
Pairing Using the key or
the Steering Wheel Control
key
When No Devices have been
Paired
1. Press the key or the
key on the steering remote con-
troller. The following screen is dis-
played.
2. Press the button to enter
the Pair Phone screen.
1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3. From your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
OK
PHONE
PHONE
4263
Features of your vehicle
[Non SSP supported device]
(SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
entered.
Enter the passkey “0000” to pair your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device with the car audio system.
[SSP supported device]
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed 6 digits passkey.
Check the passkey on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
5.Once pairing is complete, the fol-
lowing screen is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
If Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are cur-
rently connected, pressing the
key or the key on the steering
wheel displays the following screen.
Press the button to pair a new
device or press the to connect
a previously paired device.
Pairing through [PHONE]
Setup
Press the key Select
Select Select
TUNE knob
1. The following steps are the same
as those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
Pair Phone
Phone
SETUP
Connect
Pair
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2644
✽✽
NOTICE
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology fea-
tures supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting, MIC
on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth
®
Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology devices can be paired to
the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device can be connected
at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device is
connected.
• Only Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth
®
audio relat-
ed features are supported.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Bluetooth
®
related operations are
possible only with devices that sup-
port Handsfree or audio features,
such as a Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology mobile phone or a
Bluetooth
®
audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device becomes discon-
nected due to being out of communica-
tion range, turning the device OFF, or
a Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology com-
munication error, corresponding
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices
are automatically searched and recon-
nected.
• If the system becomes unstable due
to communication errors between the
car Handsfree and the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device, reset the
device by turning off and back on
again. Upon resetting Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device, the sys-
tem will be restored.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• After pairing is complete, a contacts
download request is sent once to the
mobile phone. Some mobile phones
may require confirmation upon
receiving a download request, ensure
your mobile phone accepts the con-
nection. Refer to your phones user’s
manual for additional information
regarding phone pairing and connec-
tions.
4265
Features of your vehicle
Connecting a Device
Press the key Select
Select
1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the button.
Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology devices with the
car audio system. The "Change
Priority" feature is used to set the
connection priority of paired phones.
Press the key Select
Select
Paired Phone ListPhone
SETUP
Connect
Paired Phone ListPhone
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2664
From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
button from the Menu.
The selected device will be changed
to the highest priority.
✽✽
NOTICE
Priority icon will be displayed when the
selected phone is set as a priority phone.
Disconnecting a Device
Press the key Select
Select
From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the button.
Deleting a Device
Press the key Select
Select
From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the button.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When deleting the currently con-
nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to proceed
with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.
Delete
Paired Phone ListPhone
SETUP
Disconnect
Paired Phone ListPhone
SETUP
Change priority
4267
Features of your vehicle
USING
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology
Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
device connected, press the
key to display the Phone menu
screen.
1) Favorites : Up to 20 frequently
used contacts can be saved for
easy access
2) Call History : Displays the call his-
tory list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
5) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If you press the button
but there is no call history data, a
prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you press the button but
there is no contact data stored, a
prompt is displayed which asks to
download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported in
some mobile phones. For more infor-
mation on download support, refer
to your mobile phone user’s manual.
Favorites
Press the key Select
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con-
tacts be saved as favorite.
3) Delete All : Deletes all stored
favorite contacts
✽✽
NOTICE
• To save Favorite, contacts should be
downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not be
automatically updated if the contact
has been updated in the phone. To
update Favorites, delete the Favorite
and create a new Favorite.
Favorites
PHONE
Contacts
Call History
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2684
Call History
Press the key Select
A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the button to down-
load the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and
missed calls are stored in Call
History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and
call time information are not saved.
Contacts
Press the key Select
The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the but-
ton to download the call history.
Download
Contacts
PHONE
Download
Call History
PHONE
4269
Features of your vehicle
1) Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contact
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Sort by : Find a contact in alpha-
betical order.
3) Download : Download contact
entries
✽✽
NOTICE
• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have been
downloaded to the car cannot be
edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed
separately for each paired Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device (max 5
devices x 1,000 contacts each).
Previously downloaded data is main-
tained even if the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device has been discon-
nected. (However, the contacts and
call history saved to the phone will
be deleted if a paired phone is delet-
ed.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth
®
streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the sta-
tus bar.
• It is not possible to begin download-
ing a contact list when the contact
download feature has been turned
off within the Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology device. In addition, some
devices may require device authori-
zation upon attempting to download
contacts. If downloading does not
normally occur, check the Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device settings
or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of
supported Bluetooth
®
devices and
function support, refer to your
phone’s user manual.
Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the key Select
1) Dial Pad : Used to enter phone
number
2) Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number, If no
number has been entered, switch-
es to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time
Dial Number
PHONE
Features of your vehicle
2704
Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology device connect-
ed will display the following screen.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Accept : Accepts the incoming call
4) Reject : Rejects the incoming call
✽✽
NOTICE
• When an incoming call pop-up is dis-
played, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only the
call volume will operate.
•The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
During a Handsfree Call
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off
✽✽
NOTICE
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
4271
Features of your vehicle
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology Setting
Pairing a New Device
Press the key Select
Select
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section
within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Viewing Paired Phone List
Press the key Select
Select
This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
played.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
Connection” section within
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
1) : Moves to the previous
screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/ disconnects currently
selected phone
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Change priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority
Paired Phone List
Phone
SETUP
Paired PhonePhone
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2724
✽✽
NOTICE BEFORE DOWN-
LOADING CONTACTS
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contact
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.
Downloading Contacts
Press the key Select
Select
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
Outgoing Volume
Press the key Select
Select
Use the , buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
✽✽
NOTICE
While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the key.
SEEK
TRACK
Outgoing Volume
Phone
SETUP
Contacts DownloadPhone
SETUP
4273
Features of your vehicle
Turning Bluetooth System Off
Press the key Select
Select
Once
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
is turned off,
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology related features will not
be supported within the audio sys-
tem.
✽✽
NOTICE
To turn Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
back on, go to and
press “Yes”.
Phone
SETUP
Bluetooth System OffPhone
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2744
VOICE RECOGNITION
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the key on the
steering wheel remote controller. Say
a command.
If prompt feedback is in , then
the system will say “Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)”
• If prompt feedback is in
mode, then the system will only say
“(BEEP)”
• To change Prompt Feedback
/
, go to
✽✽
NOTICE
For proper recognition, say the com-
mand after the voice instruction and
beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4) Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).
Skipping Prompt Messages
While prompt message is being stat-
ed Shortly press the key on
the steering remote controller.
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice com-
mand.
Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the
steering remote controller.
The command wait state is immedi-
ately ended and the beep tone will
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice
command.
Prompt Feedback
System
SETUP
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
4275
Features of your vehicle
❈ Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds):
More Help
Contacts
Cancel
More Help
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a command after
the beep (BEEP)
Please say a...
Please say the contact name you want to call.
Ding~
Ding~
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod
®
'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod
®
'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
(BEEP)
Features of your vehicle
2764
Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com-
mands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
Command Function
Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
nect the call.
Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth
®
connections.
•
When listening to the radio, displays the
next radio screen.
(FM1
➟
FM2
➟
AM
➟SAT1➟SAT2➟SAT3➟
FM1)
Radio
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•
When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
AM Displays the AM screen.
(Call by Name)
Voice Command List
• Common Commands : These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
on Mobile
in Office
at Home
on Other
4277
Features of your vehicle
Command Function
FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
SIRIUS (Satellite)
•
When currently listening to the SiriusXM
®
,
maintains the current state.
•
When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM
®
screen.
SIRIUS (Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXM
®
screen.
SIRIUS Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM
®
channel.
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod
®
Plays iPod
®
music.
Command Function
My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth
®
Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth
®
device.
Mute Mutes the sound.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
0~223
(Satellite)
1~3
Features of your vehicle
2784
• FM/AM radio Commands : Available during FM, AM
radio operation
• Satellite radio Commands : Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command Function
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current pre-
set and plays for 10 seconds each.
Command Function
Channel 0~223 Play the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Information Displays the information of the current broad-
cast.
4279
Features of your vehicle
• Audio CD Commands : Commands available during
Audio CD operation
• MP3 CD and USB Commands : Commands available
during USB and MP3 CD operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused track.
Pause Pauses the current track.
Shuffle Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current track.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen-
tial order.
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number.
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Next Folder Plays the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Plays the first file in the previous folder.
Features of your vehicle
2804
•iPod
®
Commands : Commands available during iPod
®
operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused song.
Pause Pauses the current song.
Shuffle Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
Repeat Repeats the current song.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen-
tial order.
• My Music Commands : Commands available during
My Music operation
Command Function
Play Plays the currently paused file.
Pause Pauses the current file.
Shuffle Randomly plays all saved files.
Shuffle Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
order.
Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4281
Features of your vehicle
SETUP
Starting Mode
Press the key to display the
Setup screen.
You can select and control options
related to , ,
,
and .
Display Settings
Adjusting the Brightness
Press the key Select
Select
Use the , buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the Brightness
on Automatic, Day, or Night mode.
Press the button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Day : Always maintains the bright-
ness on high
3) Night : Always maintains the bright-
ness on low
Mode Pop up
Press the key Select
Select
This feature is used to display the
Mode Pop up screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the or key
will display the Mode Pop up screen.
✽✽
NOTICE
The media Mode Pop up screen can be
displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.
MEDIA RADIO
Mode Pop up
Display
SETUP
Default
Brightness
Display
SETUP
SystemPhoneClock/Calendar
SoundDisplay
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2824
MP3 Information Display
Press the key Select
Select
This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder File : Displays file name
and folder name.
2) Album Artist Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song name.
Sound Settings
Sound Settings
Press the key Select
Select
Use the , , , buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the , buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the button to reset.
SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
Press the key Select
Select
The volume level is controlled auto-
matically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On/Off.
Speed Dependent Vol.
Sound
SETUP
Default
Sound Setting
Sound
SETUP
Media Display
Display
SETUP
4283
Features of your vehicle
Voice Recognition Volume
Press the key Select
Select
Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.
Touch Screen Beep
Press the key Select
Select
This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.
Clock/Calendar Setting
Clock Settings
Press the key Select
Select
Use the , buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
✽✽
NOTICE
Press and hold the key (over
0.8 seconds) to display the Clock/
Calendar screen.
CLOCK
Clock Settings
Clock/Calendar
SETUP
Touch Screen Beep
Sound
SETUP
Voice Recognition Vol.
Sound
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2844
Calendar Settings
Press the key Select
Select
Use the , buttons to set the
Day, Month and Year setting.
Time Format
Press the key Select
Select
This feature is used to change the
clock format between 12hr or 24hr.
Clock Display
Press the key Select
Select
This feature is used to display a
clock on the screen when the audio
system is turned off.
Clock Display (Power off)
Clock/Calendar
SETUP
Time FormatClock/Calendar
SETUP
Calendar SettingsClock/Calendar
SETUP
4285
Features of your vehicle
System Setting
Memory Information
Press the key Select
Select
This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity
Prompt Feedback
Press the key Select
Select
This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
1) ON : When using voice recognition,
provides detailed guidance prompts
2) OFF : When using voice recogni-
tion, omits some guidance prompts
Language
Press the key Select
Select
This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition lan-
guage.
If the language is changed, the sys-
tem will restart and apply the select-
ed language.
LanguageSystem
SETUP
Prompt Feedback
System
SETUP
Memory Information
System
SETUP
Features of your vehicle
2864
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15
of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-
dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-
evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-
rect the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void
your authority to operate this equipment.
4287
Features of your vehicle
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operatedwith minmum 20cm between the and your body.This transmitter must
not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the
FCC.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
• Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
• Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-9
• ENGINE START/STOP button position. . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
• Starting the engine with a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
• Automatic transaxle operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
• Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
All wheel drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
• Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
• All wheel drive (AWD) transfer mode selection. . . . 5-22
• For safe all wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
• Parking brake – Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
• Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
• AUTO HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Assist Emergency Braking (AEB)/
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
• System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
• AEB warning message and system control. . . . . . . . 5-52
• Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle
in front (front radar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
• System malfunction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
• Recognizing pedestrians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
• To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
• To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
• To decrease the cruising speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• To temporarily accelerate with the cruise
control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
• To resume cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
• To turn cruise control off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Advanced smart cruise control system (ASCC). . 5-65
• Speed setting (ASCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
• Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC) . . . . . . . . 5-70
• To adjust the sensitivity of advanced smart
cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
• To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
• Limitations of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 5-81
• Drive mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Blind spot detection system (BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
• Non-operating condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . 5-92
• Warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
• The LDWS does not operate when . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
• Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
• Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
• Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
• Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
• Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
• Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
• Snowy or icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant. . . . . . . . . 5-105
• Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary . . . . . . 5-105
• Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . 5-105
• To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
• Don't let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . 5-106
• Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
• Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
• Safety chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
• Trailer brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
• Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
• Maintenance when trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
• If you do decide to pull a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
• Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
• Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Vehicle weight glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
• Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
• Vehicle curb weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
• Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
• GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
5
53
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system
does not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you hear a change
in the sound of the exhaust or if you
drive over something that strikes the
underneath side of the vehicle, have
the exhaust system checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in a
enclosed area for a prolonged
time. Exhaust fumes contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless gas that can cause
unconsciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
WARNING - Open liftgate
Do not drive with the liftgate
open. Poisonous exhaust gases
can enter the passenger com-
partment. If you must drive with
the liftgate open proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
Driving your vehicle
45
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, at the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in chapter 7,
“Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING - Distracted
driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsi-
bility is in the safe and legal
operation of the vehicle. Use of
any handled devices, other
equipment or vehicle systems
that distract the drive should
not be used during vehicle
operation.
55
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Check sur-
roundings
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING - Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause fire.
WARNING - Loose
objects
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sud-
den stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING - Driving while
intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driv-
ing drunk.
Driving your vehicle
65
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a front door is opened, the
ignition switch will illuminate for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off immediately when the
ignition switch is turned on. It will
also go off after about 30 seconds
when the door is closed.
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft (if equipped). The igni-
tion key can be removed only in the
LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position,
turn the key while turning the steer-
ing wheel right and left to release the
tension.
KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED)
OUM054001
OYP054029K
57
Driving your vehicle
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning light can
be checked in this position.
The anti-theft steering column lock (if
equipped) is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the dri-
ver’s seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in P (Park) for auto-
matic transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these pre-
cautions are not taken.
Starting the engine
1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2.Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
WARNING - Ignition
switch
Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle
is moving. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
WARNING - Proper
footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots, sandals, etc.) may
interfere with your ability to use
the brake and accelerator pedal.
Driving your vehicle
85
3.Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
4.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle is
still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION - Starter
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start,
wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-
engaging the starter. Improper
use of the starter may damage
it.
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Never reach for any controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
59
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed.
When all entrances are closed, if you
lock the vehicle by using the trans-
mitter or the smart key, the light will
go off immediately.
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/RUN
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position. When
you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, the
ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
without depressing the brake pedal
by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
OUM054004
Not illuminated
Driving your vehicle
105
ACC(Accessory)
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
ON
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
START/RUN
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/ STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
If you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without
depressing the brake pedal for auto-
matic transaxle vehicles, the engine
will not start and the ENGINE
START/STOP button changes as fol-
low:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC
Amber
Redish orange
Not illuminated
511
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON
position for a long time, the battery
will discharge.
Starting the engine with a
smart key
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park). Depress the brake pedal
fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
It should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
5.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta-
tionary.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, if it is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehicle,
a message "key is not in the vehi-
cle" will appear on the LCD display.
And if all doors are closed, the
chime will sound for 5 seconds.
The indicator or warning will turn
off while the vehicle is moving.
Always have the smart key with
you.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in an
emergency. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
Driving your vehicle
125
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 sec-
onds while it is in the ACC posi-
tion. The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
WARNING - Unintended
vehicle movement
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine
activation and/or unintended
vehicle movement.
OUM054005
513
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
position of the shift lever.
✽✽
NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
OUMA054007
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the loc
k release b
utton when shifting.
Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.
(If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal.
However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle.)
Driving your vehicle
145
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal and the lock release but-
ton when shifting from N (Neutral) to
a forward or reverse gear.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with the engine
power. Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transaxle and pre-
vents the drive wheels from rotating.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
WARNING - Leaving
Vehicle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Do not use
the P position in place of the
parking brake. Always make
sure the shift lever is latched in
the P position and set the park-
ing brake fully. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are
not followed.
CAUTION - Transaxle
To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on.The transaxle may be
damaged if you shift into P
(Park) while the vehicle is in
motion.
515
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will auto-
matically downshift to the next lower
gear.
Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual mode is selected
by pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
CAUTION - Shifting
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except when “Rocking
the vehicle” explained in this
section.
OUMA054009
Manual
mode
++
++
((
((
UU
UU
PP
PP
))
))
--
--
((
((
DD
DD
OO
OO
WW
WW
NN
NN
))
))
Driving your vehicle
165
In manual mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
manual mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
• In manual mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care to
keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In manual mode, only the 6 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse
or park the vehicle, move the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)
position as required.
• In manual mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehi-
cle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In manual mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving
on a slippery road. Push the shift
lever to the -(down) side to shift
back to the 1st gear.
517
Driving your vehicle
Paddle shifter (if equipped)
The paddle shifter is available when
the shift lever is in the D position or
the manual mode.
With the shift lever in the D position
The paddle shifter will operate when
the vehicle speed is more than
6.2mph(10km/h).
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear and the
system changes from automatic
mode to manual mode.
When the vehicle speed is lower than
6.2mph(10km/h), if you depress the
accelerator pedal for more than 5
seconds or if you shift the shift lever
from D (Drive) to manual mode and
shift it from manual mode to D (Drive)
again, the system changes from
manual mode to automatic mode.
With the shift lever in the manual
mode
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear.
✽✽
NOTICE
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you cannot
shift the gear.
OUM056200L
Driving your vehicle
185
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic
transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
into R (Reverse):
1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2.Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position.
3.Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. It is a normal condi-
tion.
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake
pedal depressed, continue depress-
ing the brake, then do the following:
1.Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock access hole (1).
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3.Move the shift lever.
4.Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
WARNING - Shifting from
park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in
or around the vehicle.
OUMA054039
519
Driving your vehicle
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. Even if the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position, the
key also cannot be removed.
If your vehicle is equipped with
ENGINE START/STOP button, the
button will not change to the OFF
position unless the shift lever is in the
P (Park) position.
Good driving practices
• Never move the gear shift lever
from P (Park) to any other position
with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the gear shift lever into
P (Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
When accelerating from a stop on
a steep hill, the vehicle may have a
tendency to roll backwards.
Shifting the shift lever into 2
(Second Gear) will help prevent
the vehicle from rolling back-
wards.
Driving your vehicle
205
Engine power can be delivered to all
front and rear wheels for maximum
traction. AWD is useful when extra
traction is required, such as, when
driving on slippery, muddy, wet, or
snow-covered roads.
These vehicles are not designed for
challenging off-road use. Occasional
off-road use such as established
unpaved roads and trails are OK. It is
always important when traveling off-
highway that the driver carefully
reduces the speed to a level that
does not exceed the safe operating
speed for those conditions. In gener-
al, off-road conditions provide less
traction and braking effectiveness
than normal road conditions.
The driver must be especially alert to
avoid driving on slopes which tilt the
vehicle to either side.
These factors must be carefully con-
sidered when driving off-road.
Keeping the vehicle in contact with
the driving surface and under control
in these conditions is always the dri-
ver's responsibility for the safety of
him/herself and his or her passen-
gers.
* AWD : All Wheel Drive
FWD : Front Wheel Drive
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OUMA054049
OUMA054010
■ Type A
■ Type B
521
Driving your vehicle
If the AWD system warning light
( ) illuminates, this indicates that
there is a malfunction in the AWD
system.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
Tight corner brake effect
Tight corner brake effect is a unique
characteristic of all wheel drive vehi-
cles caused by the difference in tire
rotation of the four wheels and the
zero-degree alignment of the front
wheels and suspension.
Sharp turns at low speeds should be
carried out with caution.
WARNING - Off road
driving
Do not attempt to operate your
vehicle under extreme or chal-
lenging off road driving condi-
tions. Although this vehicle has
off-road capabilities, it was not
designed to be driven off road.
Driving your vehicle
225
• This mode is used for climbing or descending sharp grades,
off-road driving, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc., to
maximize traction.
• This mode automatically begins to deactivate at speeds
above 19 mph (30 km/h) and is shifted to AWD AUTO mode
at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h). If the vehicle decelerates
to speeds below approximate 25 mph (40 km/h), however,
the transfer mode is shifted into AWD LOCK mode again.
AWD AUTO
(AWD LOCK is
deactivated)
(Indicator light is
not illuminated)
All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection
Transfer mode Selection button Indicator light Description
• When driving in AWD AUTO mode, the vehicle operates sim-
ilar to conventional FWD vehicles under normal operating
conditions. However, if the system determines that there is a
need for the AWD mode, the engine’s driving power is dis-
tributed to all four wheels automatically without driver inter-
vention.
• When driving on normal roads and pavement, the vehicle
moves similar to conventional FWD vehicles.
AWD LOCK
(Indicator light is
illuminated)
When the AWD LOCK mode is deactivated, a shock may be felt as the drive power is delivered entirely to the front
wheels. This shock is not a mechanical failure.
CAUTION - Normal road conditions
Do not drive on normal roads for prolonged periods of time with your vehicle locked in the AWD mode.
Driving on normal road with AWD LOCK Mode (especially, when cornering) may cause mechanical noise or
vibration which may damage your power train.
523
Driving your vehicle
For safe all wheel drive opera-
tion
• Do not try to drive in deep standing
water or mud since such conditions
can stall your engine and clog your
exhaust pipes. Do not drive down
steep hills since it requires extreme
skill to maintain control of the vehi-
cle.
• When you are driving up or down
hills; drive as straight as possible.
Use extreme caution going up or
down steep hills, the grade, terrain
and water/mud conditions may
cause the vehicle to flip.
HILL1 HILL2
WARNING - Hills
Proceed with extreme caution
when driving down steep hills.
A slight change in the wheel
angle can destabilize the vehi-
cle.This can cause your vehicle
to suddenly roll without warn-
ing and without time for you to
regain control of your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
245
• You must consciously take the
effort to learn how to corner in a
AWD vehicle. Do not rely on your
experience in conventional FWD
vehicles in choosing a safe corner-
ing speed in AWD mode. For
starters, you must drive more slow-
ly in AWD.
• Drive carefully off-road because
your vehicle may be damaged by
rocks or roots of trees. Become
familiar with the off-road conditions
where you are going to drive
before you begin driving.
• Always hold the steering wheel
firmly when you are driving off-
road.
• Make sure all passengers are
wearing seat belts.
• If you need to drive in the water,
stop your vehicle, set your transfer
to the AWD LOCK mode and drive
at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
WARNING - Steering
wheel
Do not grab the inside of the
steering wheel when you are
driving off-road. You may hurt
your arm by a sudden steering
maneuver or from steering
wheel rebound due to impact
with objects on the ground.
WARNING - Wind danger
Drive slowly in heavy winds.
The vehicle's higher center of
gravity decreases your steering
control capacity.
OUMA054053
WARNING - AWD
Reduce speed when you turn
corners.The center of gravity of
AWD vehicles is higher than
that of conventional FWD vehi-
cles, making them more likely to
roll over when you turn corners
too fast.
525
Driving your vehicle
✽✽
NOTICE
• Shorten your scheduled mainte-
nance interval if you drive in off-
road conditions such as sand, mud
or water (see “Maintenance under
severe usage conditions” in section
7). Always wash your vehicle thor-
oughly after off-road use, especial-
ly cleaning the bottom of the vehi-
cle.
• A full time all wheel drive vehicle
cannot be towed by an ordinary
tow truck. Make sure that the
vehicle is placed on a flat bed
truck for moving.
CAUTION - Mud or snow
Do not run the engine continu-
ously at high RPMs to free the
vehicle from snow or mud. Doing
so could damage the AWD sys-
tem in your vehicle.
WARNING - AWD driving
Do not attempt quick steering
maneuvers or sharp turns in
AWD mode. Such maneuvers
increase the risk of rollover
accidents. Rollover accidents
are extremely violent and
unpredictable.
WARNING - Driving
through water
Drive slowly. If you are driving
too fast in water, the water can
get into the engine compartment
and wet the ignition system,
causing your vehicle to sudden-
ly stop. If this happens and your
vehicle is in a tilted position,
your vehicle may roll over.
Driving your vehicle
265
Do not use a tire and wheel package
with a different size and type from
the one originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which
could lead to steering failure or
rollover causing serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to
equip all four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type, tread,
brand and load-carrying capacity. If
you equip your vehicle with any
tire/wheel combination not recom-
mended by Kia for off-road driving,
ou should not use thesetires for high
way driving.
• Full-time AWD vehicles must be
tested on a special four wheel
chassis dynamometer.
• A full-time AWD vehicle should not
be tested on a FWD roll tester. If a
FWD roll tester must be used, per-
form the following:
1. Check the tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as
shown in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the tem-
porary free roller as shown in the
illustration.
WARNING - Jacked
vehicle
While the full-time AWD vehicle
is being raised on a jack, never
start the engine or cause the
tires to rotate.
There is the danger that rotating
tires touching the ground could
cause the vehicle to go off the
jack and to jump forward.
OUM054011
Roll tester (speedometer)
Temporary free roller
527
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehi-
cle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
Always test your brakes in this fash-
ion after driving through deep water.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING - Steep hill
braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking per-
formance.
CAUTION - Brake Pedal
Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
Driving your vehicle
285
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes. You
may hear this sound come and go or
it may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a
sudden loss of control of the
vehicle. If you must use the
parking brake to stop the vehi-
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
WARNING - Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched wear
sounds from your brakes. If you
ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking per-
formance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
CAUTION - Replace brake
pads
Do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads. Continuing to
drive with worn brake pads can
damage the braking system and
result in costly brake repairs.
529
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake – Foot type
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then
depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake,
depress the parking brake pedal a
second time while applying the foot
brake. The pedal will automatically
extend to the fully released position.
OYP054009K
OYP054010K
CAUTION - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad (or lining) and brake
rotor wear.
WARNING - Parking brake
use
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
Driving your vehicle
305
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is nec-
essary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Electronic parking brake (EPB)
(if equipped)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electronic parking
brake):
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes
on.
W-75
OUMA054013
531
Driving your vehicle
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly if the Auto Hold button is on when
the engine is turned off. However, if
you press the EPB switch after the
engine is turned off, the EPB will not
be Applied.
✽✽
NOTICE
On a steep incline or when pulling a
trailer, if the vehicle does not remain
at a standstill, do as follows:
1. Apply the EPB.
2. Pull up the EPB switch for more
than 3 seconds.
Do not operate the parking brake/
EPB while the vehicle is moving
except in an emergency situation.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electronic parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the
following condition:
• Have the ignition switch or engine
start/stop button in the ON posi-
tion.
• Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
OUMA054014
Driving your vehicle
325
To release EPB (electronic parking
brake) automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Reverse) or D
(Drive).
• Automatic transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine
hood and trunk.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal
while the shift lever is in R
(Rear), D (Drive) or Sports
mode.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
✽✽
NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage
the EPB even though the ignition
switch or engine stop/start button
is in the OFF position, but you
cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking
brake manually with the EPB
switch when you drive downhill or
when backing up the vehicle.
Do not follow the above procedure
when driving on a flat level ground.
The vehicle may suddenly move for-
ward.
CAUTION
• If the parking brake warning
light is still on even though
the EPB has been released,
have the system checked by
an authorized Kia dealer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and
brake rotor wear.
533
Driving your vehicle
EPB (electronic parking brake) may
be automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
✽✽
NOTICE
If the driver turns the engine off by
mistake while Auto Hold is operat-
ing, EPB will be automatically
applied. (Vehicles equipped with
Auto Hold)
System warning
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
applied, but the EPB doesn't
release automatically, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
tened and the engine hood, driver's
door or trunk is opened, a warning
will sound and a message will
appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehi-
cle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
If the above situation occurs, depress
the brake pedal and release EPB by
pressing the EPB switch.
OUM054104L
WARNING - Parking
Brake Use
All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parked to avoid inadver-
tent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedes-
trians.
Driving your vehicle
345
• A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet, make
sure to inform him/her how to oper-
ate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if you
drive with the EPB applied.
• When you automatically release
EPB by depressing the accelerator
pedal, depress it slowly.
System warning
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
✽✽
NOTICE
Depress the brake pedal when the
above message appears for the Auto
Hold and EPB may not activate.
OUM054100L
OUM054101L
■ Type A
■ Type B
535
Driving your vehicle
System warning
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold
is activated because of ESC
(Electronic Stability Control) signal, a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is changed
to the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tem is operation normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the igni-
tion switch or the engine start/stop
button is changed to the ON position,
this indicates that the EPB may have
malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
OUM054106
■ Type A ■ Type B
OUM054102L
OUM054103L
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
365
• The EPB warning light may illumi-
nate if the EPB switch operates
abnormally. Shut the engine off
and turn it on again after a few min-
utes. The warning light will go off
and the EPB switch will operate
normally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, have the
system checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
• If the parking brake warning light
does not illuminate or blinks even
though the EPB switch was pulled
up, the EPB is not applied.
• If the parking brake warning light
blinks when the EPB warning light
is on, press the switch, then pull it
up. Once more press it back to its
original position and pull it back up.
If the EPB warning does not go off,
have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency brak-
ing is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch.
✽✽
NOTICE
During emergency braking by the
EPB, the parking brake warning
light will illuminate to indicate that
the system is operating.
If you notice a continuous noise or
burning smell when the EPB is used
for emergency braking, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
When the EPB (electronic parking
brake) is not released
If the EPB does not release normal-
ly, take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer by loading the vehicle on
a flatbed tow truck and have the sys-
tem checked.
WARNING
Do not operate the electronic
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving except in an emer-
gency situation. Applying the
electronic parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden
loss of control of the vehicle. If
you must use the electronic
parking brake to stop the vehi-
cle, use great caution in apply-
ing the brake.
537
Driving your vehicle
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle
in a standstill even though the brake
pedal is not depressed after the driv-
er brings the vehicle to a complete
stop by depressing the brake pedal.
1.Depress the brake pedal, start the
engine and then press the Auto
Hold button. The white AUTO
HOLD indicator will come on indi-
cating the system is in standby.
Before the Auto Hold will engage,
the driver's door, engine hood and
trunk must be closed and the dri-
ver's seat belt must be fastened.
2.When coming to a complete stop
by depressing the brake pedal, the
AUTO HOLD indicator changes
from white to green indicating the
AUTO HOLD is engaged and EPB
is applied. The vehicle will remain
at a standstill even if you release
the brake pedal.
3.If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
OUMA054016
WW
WW
hh
hh
ii
ii
tt
tt
ee
ee
OUM054017
WW
WW
hh
hh
ii
ii
tt
tt
ee
ee
GG
GG
rr
rr
ee
ee
ee
ee
nn
nn
Driving your vehicle
385
4.If you press the accelerator pedal
with the shift lever in R (Reverse),
D (Drive) or sports mode, the Auto
Hold will be released automatically
and the vehicle will start to move.
The indicator changes from green
to white indicating the Auto Hold is
in standby and the EPB is
released.
When driving off from Auto Hold by
depressing the accelerator pedal,
always check the surrounding area
near your vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator pedal
for a smooth launch.
Cancel
To cancel the Auto Hold operation,
press the Auto Hold switch. The
AUTO HOLD indicator will go out.
To cancel the Auto Hold operation
when the vehicle is at a standstill,
press the Auto Hold switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The following are conditions when
the Auto Hold will not engage
(Auto Hold light will not turn
green and the Auto Hold system
remains in stand by):
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold
automatically switches to EPB
under any of the following condi-
tions (Auto Hold light remains
white and the EPB automatically
applies):
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The vehicle is in a standstill for
more than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a steep
slope
- The vehicle moved several times
(Continued)
OUMA054018
LL
LL
ii
ii
gg
gg
hh
hh
tt
tt
oo
oo
ff
ff
ff
ff
539
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
In these cases, the brake warning
light comes on, the AUTO HOLD
indicator changes from green to
white, and a warning sounds and a
message will appear to inform you
that EPB has been automatically
engaged. Before driving off again,
press foot brake pedal, check the
surrounding area near your vehi-
cle and release parking brake
manually with the EPB switch.
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator
lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is
not working properly. Take your
vehicle to an authorized Kia deal-
er and have the system checked.
If there is a malfunction with the dri-
ver’s door, engine hood or trunk open
detection system, the Auto Hold may
not work properly.
Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia
dealer and have the system checked.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click or electric brake motor
whine sound may be heard while
operating or releasing the EPB, but
these conditions are normal and
indicate that the EPB is functioning
properly.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of an acci-
dent, do not activate Auto Hold
while driving downhill, backing
up or parking your vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
405
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds
in the following circumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving with tire chains
installed
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increase
the stopping distance for your vehi-
cle.
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
541
Driving your vehicle
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and have operated your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be active
continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light goes off, then your
ABS system is normal. Otherwise,
you may have a problem with the
ABS. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
✽✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has mal-
functioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
W-78
Driving your vehicle
425
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine manage-
ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
Only a safe and attentive driver can
prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the condi-
tions.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system
designed to help the driver maintain
vehicle control under adverse condi-
tions. It is not a substitute for safe driv-
ing practices. Factors including speed,
road conditions and driver steering
input can all affect whether ESC will be
effective in preventing a loss of control.
It is still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the wheels,
you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensa-
tion in the brake pedal. This is normal
and it means your ESC is active.
✽✽
NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the Electronic
Stability Control System is function-
ing properly.
OUMA054019
543
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, the ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel a
slight pulsation in the vehi-
cle. This is only the effect
of brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or driving on a slip-
pery road, pressing the
accelerator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC
off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains off.
Upon restarting the engine,
the ESC will automatically
turn on again.
-
Driving your vehicle
445
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF )
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the trac-
tion control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only oper-
ates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi-
cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine con-
trol function and brake control func-
tion do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if the ESC system is operat-
ing normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
OUM054165L
OUM054161L
■ Type A
■ Type B
OUM054162L
OUM054163L
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
545
Driving your vehicle
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• ESC should be turned on for daily
driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
✽✽
NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated). If the ESC is left on,
it may prevent the vehicle speed
from increasing, and result in false
diagnosis.
• Turning the ESC off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
WARNING - Operating
ESC
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating (ESC
indicator light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip
out of control.
WARNING - Electronic sta-
bility control
Drive carefully even though
your vehicle has Electronic
Stability Control. It can only
assist you in maintaining con-
trol under certain circum-
stances.
Driving your vehicle
465
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further
enhancements to vehicle stability
and steering responses when a vehi-
cle is driving on a slippery road or a
vehicle detects changes in coeffi-
cient of friction between right wheels
and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESC
indicator light ( ) blinks.
When the vehicle stability manage-
ment is operating properly, you can
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
and/or abnormal steering responses
(EPS). This is only the effect of brake
and EPS control and indicates noth-
ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gra-
dient or incline
• Driving in reverse
• ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESC OFF button to
turn off the ESC, the VSM will also
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light
goes out.
WARNING - Tire/
Wheel size
When replacing tires and wheels,
make sure they are the same size
as the original tires and wheels
installed. Driving with varying
tire or wheel sizes may diminish
any supplemental safety benefits
of the VSM system.
547
Driving your vehicle
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if
you don’t cancel the VSM operation
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It
indicates that a malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the
Electric Power Steering system or
VSM system. If the ESC indicator
light ( ) or EPS warning light
remains on, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
✽✽
NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 13 mph (22
km/h) on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 6 mph (10
km/h) when a vehicle is braking on
a split-mu road. The split-mu road
is made of surfaces which have dif-
ferent friction forces.
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for safe
driving practices but a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the respon-
sibility of the driver to always check
the speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead. Always hold the
steering wheel firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate
according to the driver’s intention,
even with installed VSM. Always
follow all the normal precautions
for driving at safe speeds for the
conditions – including driving in
clement weather and on a slippery
road.
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
A vehicle has the tendency to roll
back on a steep hill when it starts to
go after stopping. The Hill-start
Assist Control (HAC) prevents the
vehicle from rolling back by applying
the brakes automatically for about 2
seconds. The brakes are released
when the accelerator pedal is
depressed or after about 2 seconds.
The HAC is activated only for about 2
seconds, so when the vehicle is
starting off always depress the accel-
erator pedal.
WARNING - Maintaining
Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need
to apply brakes while stopped
on an incline. While stopped,
make sure you maintain brake
pressure sufficient to prevent
your vehicle from rolling back-
ward and causing an accident.
Don’t release the brake pedal
until you are ready to accelerate
forward.
Driving your vehicle
485
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and the parking
brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized Kia dealer for assis-
tance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effective-
ness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P (auto-
matic transaxle). If your vehicle is
facing downhill, turn the front
wheels into the curb to help keep
the vehicle from rolling. If your vehi-
cle is facing uphill, turn the front
wheels away from the curb to help
keep the vehicle from rolling. If
there is no curb or if it is required
by other conditions to keep the
vehicle from rolling, block the
wheels.
549
Driving your vehicle
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal.This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
Driving your vehicle
505
The AEB system is to reduce or to
avoid accident risk. It recognizes the
distance from the vehicle ahead or
the pedestrian through the sensors
(i.e. radar and camera), and, if nec-
essary, warns the driver of accident
risk with the warning message or the
warning alarms.
✽✽
NOTICE
Take the following precautions when
using the Assist Emergency Braking
(AEB):
• This system is only a supplemental
system and it is not intended to,
nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the
driver. The sensing range and
objects detectable by the sensors
are limited. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accor-
dance with the road conditions or
while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to prevent
unexpected and sudden situations
from occurring. AEB does not stop
the vehicle completely and does
not avoid collisions.
System setting and activation
System setting
The driver can activate the AEB by
placing the ignition switch to the ON
position and by selecting 'User
Settings', 'Driving Assist', and 'Assist
Braking System'. The AEB deacti-
vates, when the driver cancels the
system setting.
ASSIST EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB)/ FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
(IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
-
Assist Emergency
Braking (AEB) Limitations
The AEB system is a supple-
mental system and is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving prac-
tices. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
speed and distance to the vehi-
cle ahead to ensure it is safety
to use the AEB system.
OUMA057220
551
Driving your vehicle
The warning light illumi-
nates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the AEB
system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. When the warning
light remains ON with the AEB acti-
vated, we recommend you to have
the system checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
The driver can select the initial warn-
ing activation time in the User
Settings in the instrument cluster
LCD display. The options for the ini-
tial Forward Collision Warning
include the following:
• EARLY - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward Collision
Warning is activated earli-
er than normal. This set-
ting maximizes the
amount of distance
between the vehicle or
pedestrian ahead before
the initial warning occurs.
• NORMAL - When this condition is
selected, the initial
Forward Collision
Warning is activated
normally. This setting
allows for a nominal
amount of distance
between the vehicle or
pedestrian ahead
before the initial warn-
ing occurs.
• LATE - When this condition is
selected, the initial Forward
Collision Warning is activat-
ed later than normal. This
setting reduces the amount
of distance between the
vehicle or pedestrian ahead
before the initial warning
occurs.
OUMA057229
OUMA057231
Driving your vehicle
525
Prerequisite for activation
The AEB will activate when the AEB
is selected on the LCD display, and
when the following prerequisites are
satisfied:
- The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is activated.
- The driving speed is over 6 mph.
(The AEB only works within a cer-
tain range of vehicle speeds)
- When the AEB recognizes a vehi-
cle or the pedestrian in front. (The
AEB may not recognize every
obstacle or provide warnings and
braking in every situation, so do not
rely on the AEB to stop the vehicle
in instances where the driver sees
an obstacle and has the ability to
apply the brakes)
• The AEB automatically activates
when you turn the vehicle on.
The driver can deactivate the AEB
by canceling it in the system set-
tings on the LCD display.
• Even when the Assist Emergency
Braking (AEB) may be set to "Use
AEB" setting, if the Traction Control
System (TCS) or Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) features
are deselected, AEB function will
be turned off automatically. In this
case, the AEB feature cannot be
turned on manually as well.
AEB warning message and
system control
Warning text may appear or warning
sound may sound when the vehicle in
front brakes suddenly or the distance
with the vehicle in front is short. Also,
the brake system will control the
brakes depending on the collision
possibility.
Depending on the vehicle condition
and traffic conditions in front of the
vehicle, some warning features may
activate or not activate at all.
WARNING
Set or cancel AEB with control-
ling switches on steering wheel
after stopping the vehicle in the
safe place for your safety.
Do not attempt to set or cancel
the AEB while your vehicle is
moving.
553
Driving your vehicle
Forward Warning (1st warning)
The warning message appears on
the LCD display and a warning
chime sounds.
Collision Warning (2nd warning)
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display and a warning
chime sounds.
• The AEB applies partial brakes to
reduce the impact from a collision.
Emergency braking (3
rd
warning)
• The warning message appears on
the LCD display and a warning
chime sounds.
• The AEB applies partial brakes to
release shock from the collision.
The AEB applies maximum brakes
just before the collision.
OUMA057221 OUMA057222 OUMA057223
Driving your vehicle
545
Brake operation
• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the dri-
ver’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The AEB provides additional brak-
ing power for optimum braking per-
formance, when the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the brake pedal,
or when the driver abruptly turns
the steering wheel.
• The braking control is automatical-
ly canceled, when risk factors dis-
appear.
The driver should always exercise
caution when operating the vehicle,
even though there is no warning
message or warning alarm.
✽✽
NOTICE
The AEB operates in accordance
with the risk levels, such as the dis-
tance from the vehicle/passer-by in
front, the speed of the vehicle/pass-
er-by in front, and the driver's vehi-
cle operation. Do not drive danger-
ously in order to activate to system.
Sensor to detect the distance
from the vehicle in front
(front radar)
The sensor cannot maintain proper
distance from the vehicle in front
when the sensor lens is obscured by
foreign substances, such as snow
and rain, which will adversely affect
performance. It may even temporarily
cancel the AEB. Always keep the sen-
sor clean.
WARNING
The AEB cannot avoid all colli-
sions. The AEB might not com-
pletely stop the vehicle before
collision, due to ambient weath-
er and road conditions. The
driver has the responsibility to
drive safely and control the
vehicle.
OUM054054L
555
Driving your vehicle
Warning message and warning
light
When the sensor is covered or the
sensor lens is obscured by foreign
substances, such as snow or rain,
the AEB operation may temporarily
stop. In this case, a warning mes-
sage will appear to notify the driver.
This is not a malfunction with the
AEB. To operate the AEB again,
remove the foreign substances.
✽✽
NOTICE
• Do not install any accessories,
such as a license plate bracket or
bumper sticker near the sensor
area. Do not replace the bumper
by yourself. Doing so may
adversely affect the sensing per-
formance.
• Always keep the sensor/bumper
area clean.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Also, do not spray highly
pressurized water on the sensor
installed on the bumper.
• Be careful not to apply unneces-
sary force on the frontal sensor
area. When the sensor moves out
of the correct position due to
external force, the system may not
operate correctly even without the
warning light or message. In this
case, we recommend you to have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Use only the genuine Kia sensor
cover. Do not paint the sensor
cover.
System malfunction
• When the AEB is not working prop-
erly, the AEB warning light ( )
will illuminate and the warning
message will appear for a few sec-
onds. After the message disap-
pears, the master warning light
( ) will illuminate. In this case,
we recommend you to have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Kia dealer.
OUMA057224
OUMA057233
OUMA057225
Driving your vehicle
565
• The AEB warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC warning light.
• The AEB may unnecessarily pro-
duce warning messages and warn-
ing alarms. Due to the sensing lim-
itation, the AEB may not produce
warning messages or warning
alarm at all.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AEB, the braking control does
not operate upon detecting a colli-
sion risk even with other braking
systems normally operating.
• The AEB only operates when it
identifies a vehicle/pedestrian in
front of the vehicle while driving
forward. It does not operate when
the vehicle is driving in reverse.
• The AEB can not recognize cross-
traffic or parked vehicles present-
ing a side-profile.
Limitation of the system
The AEB assists the driver in reduc-
ing a specific risk, it does not take
responsibility away from the driver to
control the vehicle in a safe manner.
The AEB monitors the driving situa-
tions through the radar and the cam-
era sensor. For any vehicle activity
occurring outside the sensor range,
the AEB may not function. The driver
should exercise caution in the follow-
ing situations, as the AEB operation
may be limited:
WARNING
The AEB is only a supplemental
system for the driver’s conven-
ience.
The driver still maintains
responsibility to control the
vehicle. Do not solely depend
on the AEB system. Rather,
maintain a safe braking dis-
tance, and, if necessary,
depress the brake pedal to
lower the driving speed.
557
Driving your vehicle
Recognizing vehicles
- The radar or the camera is
obscured by foreign substances.
- It heavily rains or snows.
- There is electromagnetic interfer-
ence.
- Something in the path of travel
deflects the radar waves.
- The vehicle in front has a narrow
body. (i.e. motorcycles and bicycles)
- The driver’s view is degraded by
driving towards sunlight, reflected
light, or darkness.
- The camera cannot see the full
profile of the vehicle in front.
- The vehicle in front has an unusu-
al shape, such as a heavily-loaded
truck or a trailer.
- When the vehicle is running on
uneven surface or changing grades.
The vehicle in front does not turn
ON the rear lights, does not have
rear lights, has asymmetric rear
lights, or has rear lights out of angle.
- The outside brightness changes
suddenly, such as when enter-
ing/exiting the a tunnel.
- The vehicle driving is unstable.
- The radar/camera sensor recogni-
tion is limited.
- Driving on a curve
The AEB performance decreases
while driving on a curve. The AEB
may not recognize the vehicle in front
even in the same lane. It may unnec-
essarily produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm at all.
While driving on a curve, exercise
caution, and, if necessary, depress
the brake pedal.
OUM054040L
Driving your vehicle
585
While driving on a curve, the AEB
may recognize the vehicle in front in
the next lane. Exercise caution, and, if
necessary, depress the brake pedal.
Or, depress the accelerator pedal to
maintain the driving speed. Always,
take a look around the vehicle for
your safety.
- Driving on a slope
The AEB performance decreases
while driving upward or downward on
a slope, not recognizing the vehicle
in front in the same lane. It may
unnecessarily produce the warning
message and the warning alarm, or it
may not produce the warning mes-
sage and the warning alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal.
- Changing lanes
Even though the vehicle in the next
lane enters into your lane, it may not
be recognized by the AEB, until it
enters the AEB sensing range.
Especially when the vehicle in the
next lane abruptly enters into your
lane, it is more likely not be recog-
nized. Always be attentive to driving
conditions.
OUM054041L OUM054042L OUM054043L
559
Driving your vehicle
When a vehicle in front of you
changes lanes suddenly to avoid a
stopped vehicle up ahead, your AEB
may not recognize the stopped vehi-
cle ahead. Always be attentive to
driving conditions.
- Recognizing the vehicle
When the vehicle in front has heavy
loading extended rearward, or when
the vehicle in front has higher ground
clearance, the AEB may not recog-
nize the nearest hazard
Recognizing pedestrians
- The pedestrian is not fully captured
by the camera sensor, or the
pedestrian does not walk in the
upright position.
- The pedestrian moves very fast.
- The pedestrian abruptly appears in
front.
- The pedestrian wears clothes sim-
ilar in color to the background.
- Conditions outside are too bright or
too dark.
- The vehicle drives at night or in the
darkness.
- There is an item similar in shape to
a person standing.
- The pedestrian is small.
- The pedestrian is using a mobility
assistance device, such as a
wheelchair or scooter.
- The pedestrian blends in with their
surroundings.
- Sensor recognition is limited by
rain, snow, fog, etc.
- There is a group of pedestrians.
OUM054046L OUM054048L
Driving your vehicle
605
✽✽
NOTICE
The system may temporarily cancel
due to the strong electric waves.
• Pay great caution to the vehicle in
front, when it has heavy loading
extended rearward, or when it has
higher ground clearance.
• The sensor only detects pedestri-
an, not carts, bicycles, motorcy-
cles, luggage bags, or strollers.
WARNING - Testing the
AEB
The AEB does not operate in
certain situations. Thus, never
test-operate the AEB against a
person or an object. It may
cause a severe injury or even
death.
WARNING - AEB and
Towing
Cancel the AEB in the User
Settings on the LCD display,
before towing another vehicle.
While towing, the brake applica-
tion may adversely affect your
vehicle safety.
561
Driving your vehicle
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 20 mph (30
km/h).
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminated) the cruise
control can be switched on acciden-
tally. Keep the cruise control system
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways in
good weather.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving in heavy or varying traffic, or
on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-
ered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.
✽✽
NOTICE
• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approx-
imately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condi-
tion.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING - Misuse of
Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front.
OUMA054021
Driving your vehicle
625
To set cruise control speed:
1.Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on.The CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
3.Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it at the desired speed.The
SET indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator at the
same time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1.0 mph (2
km/h ) each time the lever is operat-
ed in this manner.
OUMA054022
OUMA054023
OUMA054024
563
Driving your vehicle
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1.0 mph (2
km/h) each time the lever is operat-
ed in this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with the cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
• Press the CANCEL switch.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 15 mph (25
km/h).
OUMA054025OUMA054023
Driving your vehicle
645
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move the
lever up (to RES+). You will return to
your previously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 20
mph (30 km/h):
If any method other than the
CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used
to cancel cruising speed and the sys-
tem is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume
when you move the lever up.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Press the CRUISE button (the
CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions will cancel the
cruise control operation. If you want
to resume the cruise control opera-
tion, repeat the steps provided in “To
set cruise control speed” on the pre-
vious page.
OUMA054024
OUMA054022
565
Driving your vehicle
ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (ASCC) (IF EQUIPPED)
➀ Cruise indicator
➁ Set speed
➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The ASCC allows you to program the
vehicle to maintain a set speed so
long as it is not limited by traffic.
When traffic is encountered the vehi-
cle will slow down to maintain a set
distance behind traffic without
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal.
WARNING - Advanced
Smart Cruise Control
Inadvertent Activation
If the advanced smart cruise
control is left on (CRUISE indi-
cator in the instrument cluster
illuminated), it can be activated
inadvertently. Keep the
advanced smart cruise control
system off (CRUISE indicator
turn off) when the advanced
smart cruise control is not in
use to avoid setting a speed
which the driver is not aware of.
WARNING - Advanced
Smart Cruise Control
Limitations
• The advanced smart cruise
control is a supplemental sys-
tem and is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and
distance to the vehicle ahead.
(Continued)
OUMA056156
(Continued)
• Do not use the advanced
smart cruise control when it
may not be safe to keep the
car at a constant speed, for
instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-
hill or down-hill roads.
• The advanced smart cruise
control system cannot recog-
nize a stopped vehicle, pedes-
trians or an oncoming vehicle.
Always look ahead cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
• Use the advanced smart
cruise control system only
when traveling on open high-
ways in good weather condi-
tions.
Driving your vehicle
665
Speed setting (ASCC)
To set cruise control speed:
1.Press the CRUISE button, to turn
the system on. The CRUISE indi-
cator in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
• 20 mph (30 km/h) ~ 110 mph
(180 km/h) : when there is no
vehicle in front
• 0 mph (0 km/h) ~ 110 mph (180
km/h) : when there is a vehicle in
front
3. Move the lever down (to SET-),
and release it at the desired
speed. The set speed and vehicle
to vehicle distance on the LDC
screen will illuminate.
4.Release the accelerator pedal. The
desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1 mph (1.0
km/h) each time you move the
lever up (to RES+) in this manner.
• ASCC will operate to a maximum
setting of 110 mph (180 km/h).
However all local speed limit laws
must be followed.
OUMA054200
OUMA054201
OUMA054202
567
Driving your vehicle
To decrease the cruise control
set speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1 mph (1.0
km/h) each time you move the
lever down (to SET-) in this man-
ner.
• You can set the cruise control to any
speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you move the lever down (to SET-)
at increased speed, the cruising
speed will be set again.
✽✽
NOTICE
Be careful when accelerating tem-
porarily, because the speed is not
regulated automatically at this time
even if there is a vehicle in front of
you.
ASCC will be temporarily can-
celed when:
Cancelled manually
• The brake pedal is depressed.
• Press the CANCEL button.
The CRUISE indicator is illuminated
continuously.
OUMA054201 OYP054134N
Driving your vehicle
685
Cancelled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The shift lever is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or
P(Parking).
• The EPB (electronic parking brake)
is applied.
• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph
(190 km/h)
• The ESC, ABS or TCS is operat-
ing.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The AEB is activated.
• The sensor is obscured by foreign
matter such as mud or snow.
• When the vehicle is stopped for
over 5 minutes.
• The driver starts driving by pushing
the lever up (RES +) or down
(SET -) or depressing the acceler-
ator pedal approximately 3 sec-
onds after the vehicle is stopped by
the Advanced Smart Cruise
Control System with no other vehi-
cle ahead or a vehicle stopped far
away in front.
• The engine speed is over 7000
RPM.
• The ASCC system has malfunc-
tioned.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than 5
minutes.
Each of these actions will cancel
the ASCC operation. (The set
speed and vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance on the LCD display will go
off.)
If the ASCC is cancelled automati-
cally, the ASCC will not resume
even though the RES+ or SET-
lever is moved. Also, the EPB
(electronic parking brake) will be
applied when the vehicle is
stopped.
If the ASCC is cancelled by a reason
not mentioned, have the system
checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
If the system is automatically can-
celled, the warning chime will sound
and a message will appear for a few
seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
OUM054164L
569
Driving your vehicle
To resume cruise control set
speed:
If any method other than the
CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the cruising speed will
automatically resume when you
move the lever up/down (to RES+ or
SET-).
If you move the lever up (to RES+),
the speed will resume to the recently
set speed. It will not resume if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
To turn cruise control off:
Press the CRUISE button. (the
CRUISE indicator in the instrument
cluster will go off).
WARNING - Cruise
control reactivation
To reduce the risk of an acci-
dent, always check the road
conditions when reactivating
the advanced smart cruise con-
trol using the RES+ lever to
ensure the road conditions per-
mit safe use of the cruise con-
trol.
OUMA054202
OUMA054200
Driving your vehicle
705
Vehicle to vehicle distance
setting (ASCC)
To set vehicle to vehicle distance:
This function allows you to program
the vehicle to maintain relative dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead without
depressing the accelerator pedal or
brake pedal.
The vehicle to vehicle distance will
automatically activate when the
ASCC is on.
Select the appropriate distance
according to road conditions and
vehicle speed.
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
For example, if you drive at 56 mph
(90 km/h), the distance is maintained
as follows;
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet
(52.5 m)
Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet
(40 m)
Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet
(32.5 m)
Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet
(25 m)
✽✽
NOTICE
The 'Distance 4' is always set when
the system is used for the first time
after starting the engine.
OUMA054210
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
571
Driving your vehicle
• The vehicle will maintain the set
speed, when the lane ahead is
clear.
• The vehicle will slow down or
speed up within selected speed to
maintain the selected distance,
when there is a vehicle ahead of
you in the lane. (A vehicle will
appear in front of your vehicle in
the LCD display only when there is
an actual vehicle in front of you)
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up,
your vehicle will travel at a steady
cruising speed after accelerating to
the selected speed.
OYP054137N
Distance 4
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 1
Driving your vehicle
725
• The warning chime sounds and
LCD display blinks if it is hard to
maintain the selected distance to
the vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
actively adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
• Even if the warning chime is not
activated, always pay attention to
the driving conditions to prevent
dangerous situations from occur-
ring.
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed:
less than 20 mph (30 km/h)) moves
to the next lane, the warning chime
will sound and a message will
appear.
If a vehicle enters into your lane
moving less than the designated
speed, you can adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the brake
pedal.
In traffic situation
In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the
vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if
the vehicle ahead of you starts mov-
ing, your vehicle will start as well.
However, if the vehicle stops for
more than 3 seconds, you must
depress the accelerator pedal or
move up/down the lever (to RES+ or
SET-) to start driving.
OUMA057169
OUM054168L
573
Driving your vehicle
Radar to detect distance to the
vehicle ahead
The sensor detects distance to the
vehicle ahead.
If the sensor is covered with dirt or
other foreign matter, the vehicle to
vehicle distance control may not
operate correctly.
Always keep the sensor clean.
Radar check message
If the radar or cover is dirty or
obscured with foreign matter such as
snow, this message will appear. In this
case, the system may not function
temporarily, but it does not indicate a
malfunction of the Advanced Smart
Cruise Control System. Clean the
radar or cover by using a soft cloth.
ASCC (Advanced Smart Cruise
Control) malfunction message
The message will appear when the
vehicle to vehicle distance control
system is not functioning normally.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the system
checked.
OUM054054L
OUMA057226
OUM054187L
Driving your vehicle
745
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• Use only a genuine Kia sensor
cover for your vehicle.
• Do not install accessories around
the sensor and do not replace the
bumper by yourself. It may interfere
with the sensor performance.
• Impact damage to the sensor or
sensor area may cause the sensor
to move slightly off position and
result in the ASCC not operating
correctly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
To adjust the sensitivity of
Advanced Smart Cruise
Control
The sensitivity of vehicle speed
when following the front vehicle to
maintain the set distance can be
adjusted. Go to the User Settings
Mode (Driving Assist) and select
SCC (Smart Cruise Control). You
may select one of the three stages
you prefer.
• Slow:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is slower than normal speed.
• Normal:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is normal
• Fast:
Vehicle speed following the front
vehicle to maintain the set distance
is faster than normal speed.
✽✽
NOTICE
The system remembers the last
selected mode.
CAUTION - Sensor
Damage
To prevent sensor cover dam-
age from occurring, wash the
car with a soft cloth.
OUM054157L
575
Driving your vehicle
To convert to cruise control
mode:
The driver may choose to only use
the cruise control mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
1.Turn the ASCC on (the cruise indi-
cator light will be on but the system
will not be activated).
2.Push the distance to distance
switch for more than 2 seconds.
3.Choose between "Smart cruise
control (SCC) mode" and "Cruise
control (CC) mode".
When using the cruise control mode,
you must manually assess the dis-
tance to other vehicles as the system
will not automatically brake to slow
down for other vehicles.
Limitations of the system
The ASCC may have limits to its abil-
ity to detect distance to the vehicle
ahead due to road and traffic condi-
tions.
OUM054167L
OUM054166L
OUM054040L
Driving your vehicle
765
On curves
• On curves, the ASCC may not
detect a moving vehicle in your
lane, and then your vehicle could
accelerate to the set speed. Also,
the vehicle speed will rapidly slow
down when the vehicle ahead is
recognized suddenly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
• Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent
lane. Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition. Apply
the accelerator pedal and select
the appropriate set speed. Check
to be sure that the road conditions
permit safe operation of the ASCC.
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the ASCC may not detect a moving
vehicle in your lane, and cause
your vehicle to accelerate to the
set speed. Also, the vehicle speed
will rapidly slow down when the
vehicle ahead is recognized sud-
denly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
OUM054041L
OUM054042L
577
Driving your vehicle
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor until it
is in the sensor's detection range.
• The sensor may not detect imme-
diately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is slower than your vehicle,
your speed may decrease to main-
tain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is faster than your vehicle,
your vehicle will accelerate to the
selected speed.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
OUM054043L
OUM054044L
Driving your vehicle
785
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles ahead in your lane
cannot be recognized by the sensor
as follows:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile such
as trailers with no loads
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
trunk
- While making turns by steering
- When driving to one side of the lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or on
curves
Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal accord-
ing to the road condition ahead and
driving condition.
• When vehicles are at a standstill
and the vehicle in front of you
changes to the next lane, be care-
ful when your vehicle starts to
move because it may not recog-
nize the stopped vehicle in front of
you.
OUM054045L
OUM054046L
579
Driving your vehicle
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles car-
rying loads that sticks out to the
back of the vehicle.
WARNING - Safe Use of
ASCC
The ASCC can provide you with
an additional level of safety and
fatigue reduction. However you
must maintain careful observa-
tion of the roadway in front of
and around you and maintain
control of your vehicle and
spacing around other vehicles
as you normally would. For
example, this will require you to
apply the brakes as needed
when coming upon a slower
moving vehicle, or when a vehi-
cle from another lane cuts in
front of you.
OUM054047L OUM054048L
Driving your vehicle
805
- After an engine start, please stop
for several seconds. If system ini-
tialization is not completed, the
ASCC does not normally operate.
- After an engine start, if any objects
are not detected or the sensor
cover is obscured with foreign sub-
stances, there is a possibility that
the ASCC system may not work.
- Below conditions may cause mal-
function: over baggage loading in a
trunk, suspension remodeling, tire
replacement with unauthorized
tires or tires with different worn-out
and pressure levels.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.
Radio frequency radiation expo-
sure information:
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance
of 20 cm between the radiator
(antenna) and your body.
This transmitter must not be co-
located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmit-
ter.
WARNING - Inclines &
Towing
Do not use ASCC on steep
inclines or when towing another
vehicle or trailer since such
extreme loading can interfere
with your vehicle's ability to
maintain the selected speed.
581
Driving your vehicle
DRIVE mode
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
❈ When normal mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the cluster.
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve
fuel efficiency by control-
ling certain engine and
transaxle system operat-
ing parameters. Fuel effi-
ciency depends on the
driver's driving habit and
road condition.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the ECO mode is select-
ed, the ECO indicator
(green) will illuminate to
show that the Active
ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is
activated, it does not
turn off even though the
engine is restarted
again. To turn off the
system, press the
DRIVE MODE button
again.
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OUMA054036
■ Type A
■ Type B
OUMA054037
NORMAL
SPORT ECO
ECO
Driving your vehicle
825
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced even though you depress
the accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the Active Eco
System is activated to improve fuel
efficiency.
Limitation of Active ECO opera-
tion:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using manual mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec-
onds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on
dynamic driving by auto-
matically adjusting the
steering wheel, engine
and transaxle system.
• When the DRIVE MODE
button is pressed and
the SPORT mode is
selected, the SPORT
indicator (yellow) will illu-
minate.
• When the SPORT mode
is activated, and the
engine start/stop button
is turned off and on it will
change to NORMAL
mode. To turn on the
SPORT mode press
DRIVE MODE button
again.
SPORT
583
Driving your vehicle
• If the system is activat-
ed:
- While holding vehicle
speed, it maintains the
gear and RPM for some
time even though the
accelerator pedal is not
depressed.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
✽✽
NOTICE
In Sport drive mode, the fuel effi-
ciency may decrease.
Driving your vehicle
845
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert
the driver.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides and indication
to the driver.
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The warning range depends on
your vehicle speed. However, if
your vehicle is about 6 mph (10
km/h) faster than the other vehi-
cle, the system will not warn you.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
When a vehicle approaches you
at high speed, the system will
warn you.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves rear-
ward, and the sensor detects an
approaching vehicle in the left or
right side, the system will warn
you.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - BSD
Limitations
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system. Do not solely rely
on the system and always pay
attention to drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle
and is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane chang-
ing procedures. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes.
OUM054176L
585
Driving your vehicle
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
The indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate when the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) switch is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
If vehicle speed exceeds 18.6 mph
(30 km/h), the system will activate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF
and ON the system returns to the
previous state.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec-
onds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on.
2.Vehicle speed is above 18.6 mph
(30 km/h).
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side.
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
OUMA054027
Driving your vehicle
865
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror.
If the detected vehicle is not in
detecting range, the warning will turn
off according to driving conditions.
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane
When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror and an alarm
will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
the original position, the second
stage alert will be deactivated.
- The second stage alarm may be
deactivated.
• To activate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and select "BSD" on the
LCD display.
• To deactivate the alarm:
Go to the User Settings Mode →
Sound and deselect "BSD" on the
LCD display.
✽✽
NOTICE
The alarm function helps alert the
driver. Deactivate this function only
when it is necessary
OUM054029
2nd stage
OUM054028
1st stage
587
Driving your vehicle
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside of the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
Warning message
The message will appear to notify
the driver if there are foreign sub-
stances on the rear bumper or it is
hot near the rear bumper. The light
on the switch and the system will
turn off automatically.
Remove the foreign substance on
the rear bumper.
After the foreign substance is
removed, if you drive for approxi-
mately 10 minutes, the system will
work normally.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign substance is
removed, take your vehicle to an
authorized Kia dealer and have the
system checked.
OUM054030
OUMA057228
■ Type A
■ Type B
OUMA057227
Driving your vehicle
885
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.The
system will turn off automatically.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer.
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
Operating conditions
• Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) in "User Settings" under
"Driving Assist" on the instrument
cluster. The system will turn on and
standby to activate.
• Select RCTA again, to turn the sys-
tem off.
• If the vehicle is turned off and on
again, the RCTA system will return
to the state right before the vehicle
was turned off. Always turn the
RCTA system off when not in use.
OUM054178L
OYP054026K OUM054124L
589
Driving your vehicle
• The system operates when the
vehicle speed is below 6.2 mph (10
km/h) with the shift lever in R
(Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is 0.5m ~
20m based on the side direction. If
the approaching vehicle speed is
2.5 mph (4 km/h) ~ 22 mph (36
km/h) within sensing range, it is
detected. However, the system
sensing range is different based on
conditions. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
Warning type
• If the vehicle detected by sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warn-
ing chime will sound and the warn-
ing light will blink on the outside
rearview mirror.
• If the detected vehicle is out of the
sensing range of your vehicle,
move the vehicle away from the
detected object slowly; the warning
will be cancelled.
• The system may not operate prop-
erly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
❈ If your vehicle's left or right side
bumper is blinded by barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing abili-
ty may be deteriorated.
OYP054027K
WARNING
The Blind Spot Detection
System with Lane Change
Assist and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert is not a substitute for
proper and safe lane changing
procedures. Always drive safely
and use caution when changing
lanes. The Blind Spot Detection
System may not detect every
object alongside the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
905
✽✽
NOTICE
• The system may not work proper-
ly if the bumper has been replaced
or if a repair work has been done
near the sensor.
• The detection area differs accord-
ing to the roads width. If the road
is narrow the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• On the contrary, if the road is very
wide the system may not detect
other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.
Non-operating condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not assist the driver and may not
work properly.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The sensor cover is obscured by
rain, snow, mud, etc
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or hidden with a foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle stand etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or the
sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle has signif-
icantly changed such as when the
trunk is loaded with heavy objects,
abnormal tire pressure etc.
- Due to bad weather such as heavy
rain or snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, etc.
- A substantial amount of metallic
objects such as a construction
area.
- A large vehicle is nearby such as a
bus or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer is near.
- If the vehicle starts at the same
time as the vehicle next to it and
has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes by
at a high rate of speed.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle drives at
the rear very nearby or drives very
close.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
591
Driving your vehicle
- When the temperature of rear
bumper is high.
- When parking structure covers the
sensor.
- When reversing from a parking
space with pillars or metal struc-
tures.
- When you are reversing and if the
detected vehicle is simultaneously
reversing.
- If there are small objects like shop-
ping carts and baby carriages.
- If there is a vehicle with decreased
ride height (lowered).
- When the vehicle is close to anoth-
er vehicle.
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is obscured by mud, snow, etc.
- The window is obscured by mud,
snow, etc.
- The windows are overly tinted.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many trees or bushes.
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Driving your vehicle
925
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
This system detects the lane with a
sensor at the front windshield and
notifies you if it detects that your
vehicle leaves the lane.
• The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the dri-
ver's responsibility to always check
the road conditions.
• If the sensor cannot detect the lane
or if the vehicle speed does not
exceed 40 mph (64 km/h), the
LDWS will not be able to notify you
if the vehicle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of coating on the front
windshield, the LDWS may not
work properly.
• Prevent damage to the LDWS sen-
sor from water or any liquid.
• Do not remove the LDWS parts
and avoid damaging the sensor by
avoiding a strong impacts.
• Do not put objects that reflect light
on the dash board.
• The operation of the LDWS can be
affected by several factors (includ-
ing environmental conditions). It is
the responsibility of the driver to
pay attention to the roadway and to
maintain the vehicle in it's lane at
all times.
WARNING - LDWS Alert
The LDWS is only intended to
provide you with information
regarding your vehicle's posi-
tion on the roadway. Upon
receiving an LDWS alert, you
must take the necessary steps
to maintain control of your vehi-
cle.The LDWS does not provide
any steering inputs into the
vehicle for you. It can be dan-
gerous to make a large sudden
steering input in response to an
alert, since that could result in
loss of control.
OUM054032
OUM054149
OUMA054031
593
Driving your vehicle
To operate the LDWS, press the but-
ton with the engine start/stop button
in the ON position. The indicator illu-
minates on the cluster. To cancel the
LDWS, press the button again.
If the system detects that your vehi-
cle is leaving the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 40 mph (64 km/h),
the warning operates as follows:
1. Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you
leave on the LCD display blinks yel-
low.
2. Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates.
OUM054126L
OUM054127L
■ When the sensor detects the lane line
■ When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line
OUM054133L
OUM054128L
OUM054129L
■ Left lane departure warning
■ Right lane departure warning
Driving your vehicle
945
The color of symbol will change
depend on the condition of LDWS
system.
- White color : It means the sensor
does not detect the
lane line.
- Green color : It means the sensor
detects the lane line.
Warning indicator
When the LDWS is not working prop-
erly, the warning light will illuminate
and the warning message will come
on for a few second. After the mes-
sage disappears, the master warning
light will illuminate.
Take your vehicle to an authorized
Kia dealer and have the system
checked.
The LDWS does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
or the hazard warning flasher to
change lane.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽✽
NOTICE
To change lanes, operate the turn
signal switch then change the lane.
WARNING - LDWS
Limitations
The Lane Departure Warning
System is a supplemental sys-
tem. Do not solely rely on the
system but always pay attention
and drive safely.
OUM054158L
OUM054132
OUM054133L
595
Driving your vehicle
The LDWS may not warn you
even if the vehicle leaves the
lane, or may warn you even if
the vehicle does not leave the
lane when;
• The lane is not visible due to snow,
rain, stain, a puddle or other envi-
ronmental conditions.
• The brightness of the outside
changes suddenly such as tunnel
enter/exit.
• The headlights are off at night or in
a tunnel.
• The color of the lane marking from
the road is difficult to distinguish.
• Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
• Light such as street light, sunlight
or oncoming vehicle light reflects
from water on the road.
• The lens or windshield is obscured
by mud, snow, etc.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
• The inside rear view mirror housing
overheats from being in direct sun-
light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indis-
tinct.
• The windshield is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• The sensor cannot distinguish the
lane from the road due to the
dust/dirt.
• There is a mark similar to a lane
line.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
drives hiding the lane line.
• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to
road conditions.
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane lines are
crossing.
• Putting something on the dash-
board.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
• The lane line is more than two in
either side (Left/Right)
This device complies with Part 15
of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Driving your vehicle
965
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel.To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these com-
ponents. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious con-
sequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
section 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see sec-
tion 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
597
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
WARNING - Engine off
during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the ignition while
driving could engage the steer-
ing wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine
braking effect.
Driving your vehicle
985
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-
slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when
stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Reducing the risk of a rollover
This multi-purpose passenger vehi-
cle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). SUV’s have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of per-
forming in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design charac-
teristics give them a higher center of
gravity than ordinary vehicles. An
advantage of the higher ground
clearance is a better view of the
road, which allows you to anticipate
problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger vehicles,
any more than low-slung sports vehi-
cles are designed to perform satis-
factorily in off-road conditions. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehi-
cles. Due to this risk, driver and pas-
sengers are strongly recommended
to buckle their seat belts. In a
rollover crash, an unbelted person is
more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. There are steps
that a driver can make to reduce the
risk of a rollover.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING - Downshifting
Do not downshift with an auto-
matic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident.
599
Driving your vehicle
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
roof rack with heavy cargo, and
never modify your vehicle in any way.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transaxle. Do not
race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-
cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possi-
ble damage to the transaxle.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
CAUTION - Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage that
may injure bystanders.
WARNING
- Sudden
Vehicle Movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehi-
cle if people or objects are near-
by. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as it
becomes unstuck.
Driving your vehicle
1005
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed. (On vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature.) Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
OUM054140OUM054141L
5101
Driving your vehicle
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
OUM054139L
Driving your vehicle
1025
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
result in overheating of the engine.
WARNING - Under/over
inflated tires
Always check the tires for proper
inflation before driving.
Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
For proper tire pressures, refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
WARNING - Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible. For further information
and tread limits, refer to "Tires
and wheels" in section 7.
5103
Driving your vehicle
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
If snow tires are needed, it is neces-
sary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids to occur. You
need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in
front of your vehicle. Also, apply the
brake gently. It should be noted that
installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but
will not prevent side skids.
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
Driving your vehicle
1045
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels; snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels. If snow
chains must be used, use wire-type
chains with a thickness of less than
0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your
vehicle caused by improper snow
chain use is not covered by your
vehicle manufacturers warranty.
When using tire chains, attach them
to the drive wheels as follows.
FWD : Front wheels
AWD : All four wheels
If a full set of chains is not
available for a AWD vehicle,
chains may be installed on
the front wheels only.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer's instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed. If
you hear the chains contacting the
body or chassis, stop and tighten
them. If they still make contact, slow
down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving
on cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle if available.
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.
CAUTION - Snow chains
Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for
your tires. Incorrect snow
chains can cause damage to the
vehicle body and suspension
and may not be covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
OUM054136
5105
Driving your vehicle
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h)
or the chain manufacturer’s recom-
mended speed limit, whichever is
lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other road
hazards, which may cause the
vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel
braking.
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized Kia dealer or a service
station.
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and igni-
tion system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
CAUTION - Snow chains
• Chains that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
1065
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized Kia dealer and most auto
parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint fin-
ish.
Don’t let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position.This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear shift lever in P
(Park, automatic transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
vehicle to be sure the movement of
the front wheels and the steering
components are not obstructed.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather, you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tow straps or chains, flash-
light, emergency flares, sand, shov-
el, jumper cables, window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blan-
ket, etc.
5107
Driving your vehicle
If you are considering towing with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your country's Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine their
legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for
towing trailers, cars, or other types of
vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask
an authorized Kia dealer for further
details before towing.
You may require an additional wiring
harness connector to install a trailer
hitch. Please contact an authorized
Kia dealer for more details.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer.* To
identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in
“Weight of the trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in han-
dling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly.
This section contains many time-
tested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transaxle, wheel assem-
blies, and tires are forced to work
harder against the load of the added
weight. The engine is required to
operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads. This addi-
tional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
TRAILER TOWING
CAUTION - Trailer
installation
Follow instructions in this sec-
tion when pulling a trailer.
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty.
WARNING - Towing a
trailer
Always check your towing
equipment to confirm correct
equipment size and installation
before use. Using incompatible
or incorrectly installed trailer
equipment can effect the vehi-
cle operation and endanger you
and your passengers.
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW (gross
combination weight), GVW
(gross vehicle weight), GAW
(gross axle weight) and trailer
tongue load are all within the
limits.
Driving your vehicle
1085
Hitches
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly car-
bon monoxide (CO) from your
exhaust can get into your vehicle,
as well as dirt and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• Kia trailer hitch accessory is avail-
able at an authorized Kia dealer.
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trail-
er. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufactur-
er or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recom-
mendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trail-
er. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a brak-
ing system, make sure it conforms to
your state’s regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating cor-
rectly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the
maximum allowed weight without
trailer brakes, then the trailer will also
require its own brakes as well. Be
sure to read and follow the instruc-
tions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain
them properly.
• Don’t tap into or modify your vehi-
cle's brake system.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolute-
ly certain that you have proper-
ly set up the brake system.This
is not a task for amateurs. Use
an experienced, competent
trailer shop for this work.
5109
Driving your vehicle
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint your-
self with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now a
good deal longer and not nearly so
responsive as your vehicle is by
itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working.This lets
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sud-
den turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail-
er. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane. Due to the added load to the
engine when going uphill the vehicle
may also take longer to pass than it
would on flat ground.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, just move your
hand to the left. To move the trailer to
the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects near the edge of the
road. Avoid jerky or sudden maneu-
vers. Signal well in advance before
turning or lane changes.
Driving your vehicle
1105
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the
trailer are burned out. Thus, you may
think drivers behind you are seeing
your signals when, in fact, they are
not. It’s important to check occasion-
ally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working. You must also check the
lights every time you disconnect and
then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-
tem directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
An authorized Kia dealer can assist
you in installing the wiring harness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 45
mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trail-
er brakes and you have an automat-
ic transaxle, you should drive in D
(Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat build up and extend the life of
your transaxle.
CAUTION
Always use an approved trailer
wiring harness. Failure to use
an approved trailer wiring har-
ness could result in damage to
the vehicle electrical system.
5111
Driving your vehicle
Towing up hill
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay close
attention to the engine coolant
temperature gauge to ensure the
engine does not overheat.
If the needle of the coolant temper-
ature gauge moves across the dial
towards “H” (HOT), pull over and
stop as soon as it is safe to do so,
and allow the engine to idle until it
cools down.You may proceed once
the engine has cooled sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possibil-
ity of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer
attached to your vehicle, you should
not park your vehicle on a hill. People
can be seriously or fatally injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged if they unexpected-
ly roll downhill.
However, if you ever have to park
your trailer on a hill, here's how to do
it:
1.Pull the vehicle into the parking
space. Turn the steering wheel in
the direction of the curb (right if
headed downhill, left if headed up
hill).
2.If the vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, place the vehicle in P
(Park).
3.Set the parking brake and shut off
the engine.
4.Place chocks under the trailer
wheels on the down hill side of the
wheels.
5.Start the vehicle, hold the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking
brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6.Reapply the brakes, reapply the
parking brake and shift the vehicle
to P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
7.Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the park-
ing brake set.
Driving your vehicle
1125
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1. With the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
Maintenance when trailer tow-
ing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trail-
er. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, auto-
matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant
and cooling system fluid. Brake con-
dition is another important item to
frequently check. Each item is cov-
ered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you
start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your
trailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-
nance schedule that accompanied
your trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
should be tight.
• When towing check transaxle fluid
more frequently.
CAUTION - Air condition
Do not use the A/C while using
your vehicle to tow uphill. Due
to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
on hot days or during uphill
driving.
5113
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trail-
er
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
• Do not do any towing with your
vehicle during its first 1,200 miles
(2,000 km) in order to allow the
engine to properly break in. Failure
to heed this caution may result in
serious engine or transaxle dam-
age.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized Kia dealer
for further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit,
etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 60 mph
(100 km/h)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 45 mph (70 km/h) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important con-
siderations that have to do with
weight:
Item
Theta II 2.0 Theta II 2.4 Lambda II 3.3
Maximum
trailer
weight
Without brake
System
1,650 (750) 1,650 (750) 1,650 (750)
With brake
System
2,000 (907) 2,000 (907) 2,000 (907)
With trailer
package
3,500 (1,587) - 5,000 (2,267)
Maximum tongue weight
350 (159) 280 (127) 350 (159)
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this sec-
tion.
Driving your vehicle
1145
Weight of the trailer
What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use
your trailer. For example, speed, alti-
tude, road grades, outside tempera-
ture and how often your vehicle is
used to pull a trailer are all important.
The ideal trailer weight can also
depend on any special equipment
that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehi-
cle. This weight includes the curb
weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who
will be riding in the vehicle. And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the
tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
The trailer tongue should weigh a
maximum of 10% of the total loaded
trailer weight, within the limits of the
maximum permissible trailer tongue
load. After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by mov-
ing some items around in the trailer.
C190E01JM
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
WARNING - Trailer
Always follow the loading
instructions provided with your
trailer. Improper loading can
effect vehicle operation and
result in an accident.
5115
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recom-
mended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity
weight.
OUMA054204/OUMA054205/OUMA054206/OUMA054207/OUMA054208/OUMA054209
Tire and loading information label
Driving your vehicle
1165
Vehicle capacity weight:
5 persons : 930 lbs. (420kg)
7 persons : 1,120 lbs. (506kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total - 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
- 7 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 5 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
* 2.0L Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 1,650 lbs (750 kg)
With trailer brakes
: 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
With trailer package
: 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
* 2.4L Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 1,650 lbs (750 kg)
With trailer brakes
: 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
With trailer package
: N/A
* 3.3L Engine
Without trailer brakes
: 1,650 lbs (750 kg)
With trailer brakes
: 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
With trailer package
: 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
5117
Driving your vehicle
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trail-
er.
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1.Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-
ard.
2.Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs.
and there will be five 150 lbs. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5.Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
Driving your vehicle
1185
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
(136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
1100 lbs
Luggage weight (499 kg)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
(340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
650 lbs
Luggage weight (295 kg)
ABC
Example 2
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs
Weight (635 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
860 lbs
172 lbs (78 kg) × 5
(390 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
540 lbs
Luggage weight (245 kg)
ABC
Example 3
5119
Driving your vehicle
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
OEN056020
WARNING - Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle and
vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
Driving your vehicle
1205
✽✽
NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty. Do not over-
load your vehicle.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sud-
den stop or crash.
WARNING - Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehi-
cle's tires and possible tire fail-
ure, increased stopping dis-
tances and poor vehicle han-
dling all of which may result in a
crash.
5121
Driving your vehicle
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the certification
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR
(Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the certification label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR
(Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If the engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . . 6-8
• Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
• Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Low tire pressure position telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
• Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6
What to do in an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
facia panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
OUM064001
OUM064020L
■ Type A
■ Type B
63
What to do in an emergency
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
ately or attempt to pull off the road
as this may cause a loss of control.
When the vehicle has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do
so, brake carefully and pull off the
road. Drive off the road as far as
possible and park on a firm level
ground. If you are on a divided
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
on your emergency hazard flash-
ers, set the parking brake and put
the transaxle in P (Park, automatic
transaxle).
3.Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.
If the engine stalls while driv-
ing
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized Kia dealer or seek other
qualified assistance.
✽✽
NOTICE
If there was a check engine light and
loss of power or stall and if safe to do
so, wait at least 10 seconds to restart
the vehicle after it stalls. This may
reset the car so it will no longer run
at low power condition.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
What to do in an emergency
46
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1.If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the
emergency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check the fuel level.
2.With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connec-
tors at the ignition coils and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.Check the fuel line in the engine
compartment.
4.If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized Kia dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
WARNING - Push/
pull start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload and create a
fire hazard.
65
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION - Push/pull start
to 12 Volt Battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode.
1VQA4001
Discharged
battery
Jumper Cables
Booster
battery
WARNING - Frozen
batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
risk
When jump starting your vehi-
cle be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
vehicle. Automobile batteries
contain sulfuric acid. This is
poisonous and highly corro-
sive.
WARNING - Battery
Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery
produces hydrogen gas which
will explode if exposed to flame
or sparks.
What to do in an emergency
66
Jump starting procedure
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
come in contact.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illus-
tration. First connect one end of a
jumper cable to the positive termi-
nal of the discharged battery (1),
then connect the other end to the
positive terminal of the booster
battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative
terminal of the booster battery (3),
then the other end to a solid, sta-
tionary, metallic point (for example,
the engine lifting bracket) away
from the battery (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct
battery terminals or the correct
ground. Do not lean over the bat-
tery when making connections.
5.Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle lock system cannot be
push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
WARNING - Tow starting
vehicle
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
WARNING - Battery
cables
Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal
of the booster battery to the
negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to over-
heat and crack, releasing bat-
tery acid.
67
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine will probably be
too hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P (Park,
automatic transaxle) and set the
parking brake. If the air condition-
ing is on, turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is com-
ing out from underneath the hood,
stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has
stopped. If there is no visible loss
of engine coolant and no steam,
leave the engine running and
check to be sure the engine cool-
ing fan is operating. If the fan is not
running, turn the engine off.
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leak-
ing from the radiator, hoses or
under the vehicle. (If the air condi-
tioning had been in use, it is nor-
mal for cold water to be draining
from it when you stop).
5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized Kia
dealer for assistance.
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized Kia dealer for
assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
WARNING - Under the
hood
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts to pre-
vent injury.
WARNING - Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This
may result in coolant being
blown out of the opening and
cause serious burns.
What to do in an emergency
86
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale /
TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale
(Shown on the LCD display)
Check tire pressure
• You can check the tire pressure in
the information mode on the clus-
ter.
- Refer to “User settings mode” in
chapter 4.
• Tire pressure is displayed 1~2 min-
utes later after driving.
• If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive
to display” message displays. After
driving, check the tire pressure.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the user settings mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to “User set-
tings mode” in chapter 4).
OUM064002L
OUM054185L
OUM054186L
CAUTION
• The tire pressure may change
due to factors such as parking
condition, driving style, and
altitude above sea level.
• Low tire pressure warning
may sound when a tire’s pres-
sure unit is equal or higher
than nearby tires. This is a
normal occurrence, which is
due to the change in tire pres-
sure along with tire tempera-
ture.
• The tire pressure shown on
the dashboard may differ from
the tire pressure measured by
tire pressure gauge.
69
What to do in an emergency
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximate-
ly one minute and then remain con-
tinuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehi-
cle start-ups as long as the malfunc-
tion exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function proper-
ly.
What to do in an emergency
106
✽✽
NOTICE
If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure
indicator does not illuminate for 3
seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or engine
is running, or if they remain illumi-
nated after coming on for approxi-
mately 3 seconds, take your vehicle
to your nearest authorized Kia deal-
er and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure
telltale
Low tire pressure position tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
If the telltale illuminates, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering and anticipate increased stop-
ping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pil-
lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the spare tire.
Then the TPMS malfunction indicator
and the Low Tire Pressure telltale
may turn on and illuminate after
restarting and about 20 minutes of
continuous driving before you have
the low pressure tire repaired and
replaced on the vehicle.
In winter or cold weather, the low tire
pressure telltale may be illuminated if
the tire pressure was adjusted to the
recommended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not mean
your TPMS is malfunctioning
because the decreased temperature
leads to a proportional lowering of
tire pressure.
OUM054185L
611
What to do in an emergency
When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the out-
side temperature is greatly higher or
lower, you should check the tire infla-
tion pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation pres-
sure.
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The low tire pressure telltale will illu-
minate after it blinks for approximate-
ly one minute when there is a prob-
lem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System. If the system is
able to correctly detect an underinfla-
tion warning at the same time as sys-
tem failure then it will illuminate both
the TPMS malfunction and low tire
pressure position telltales e.g. if
Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS
malfunction indicator illuminates, but
if the Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear
Right tire is under-inflated, the low
tire pressure position telltales may
illuminate together with the TPMS
malfunction indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible to determine the cause of
the problem.
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if the vehicle is
moving around electric power sup-
ply cables or radios transmitters
such as at police stations, govern-
ment and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installations,
airports, or transmitting towers,
etc. This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if snow chains
are used or some separate elec-
tronic devices such as notebook
computer, mobile charger, remote
starter or navigation etc., are used
in the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Do not drive on low pressure
tires. Significantly low tire pres-
sure can cause the tires to over-
heat and fail making the vehicle
unstable resulting in increased
braking distances and a loss of
vehicle control.
What to do in an emergency
126
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will come on. Have
the flat tire repaired by an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will remain on until
the low pressure tire is repaired and
placed on the vehicle.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire, the TPMS
malfunction indicator may illuminate
after a few minutes because the
TPMS sensor mounted on the spare
wheel is not initiated.
Once the low pressure tire is reinflat-
ed to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle or the
TPMS sensor mounted on the
replaced spare wheel is initiated by
an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS
malfunction indicator and the low tire
pressure telltale will extinguish within
a few minutes of driving.
If the indicator is not extinguished
after a few minutes of driving, please
visit an authorized Kia dealer.
If an original mounted tire is replaced
with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor
on the replaced spare wheel should
be initiated and the TPMS sensor on
the original mounted wheel should
be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor
on the original mounted wheel locat-
ed in the spare tire carrier still acti-
vates, the tire pressure monitoring
system may not operate properly.
Have the tire with TPMS serviced or
replaced by an authorized Kia deal-
er.
CAUTION - Repair
Agents
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by Kia to
repair and/or inflate a low pres-
sure tire. The tire sealant not
approved by Kia may damage
the tire pressure sensor.
613
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always
use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to measure the tire's inflation
pressure. Please note that a tire that
is hot (from being driven) will have a
higher pressure measurement than a
tire that is cold (from sitting station-
ary for at least 3 hours and driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that
3 hour period).
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Do not use any tire sealant if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System. The liq-
uid sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensors.
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors such as
nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability,
immediately take your foot off the
accelerator, apply the brakes grad-
ually and with light force, and slow-
ly move to a safe position off the
road.
✽✽
NOTICE - Protecting TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or dis-
abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may
interfere with the system's ability to
warn the driver of low tire pressure
conditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modifying,
or disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) compo-
nents may void the warranty for
that portion of the vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
146
This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
615
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The jack and wheel lug nut wrench
are stored in the luggage compart-
ment.
Remove the panel indicated in the
illustration.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
(4) Socket
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
• Always move the vehicle complete-
ly off the road and onto the shoul-
der before trying to change a tire.
The jack should be used on a firm
level ground. If you cannot find a
firm, level place off the road, call a
towing service company for assis-
tance.
• Be sure to use the correct front and
rear jacking positions on the vehi-
cle; never use the bumpers or any
other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
• Do not allow anyone to remain in
the vehicle while it is on the jack.
• Make sure any children present
are in a secure place away from
the road and from the vehicle to be
raised with the jack.
WARNING - Changing
tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in
the traffic lanes of a public road
or highway.
OUM064003
WARNING - Tire Jack
Do not place any portion of your
body under a vehicle that is
only supported by a jack since
the vehicle can easily roll off the
jack. Use vehicle support
stands.
What to do in an emergency
166
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Your spare tire is stored underneath
your vehicle, directly below the cargo
area.
To remove the spare tire:
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Find the spare tire fixing bolt cover
and remove the cover (1).
If necessary, separate the tool
case only after removing the
clamp (2).
3. Connect the socket and wheel lug
nut wrench.
4. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
loosen the bolt enough to lower
the spare tire.
Turn the wrench counterclockwise
until the spare tire reaches the
ground.
WARNING
- Running vehicle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
OUM064004
OUM064005
617
What to do in an emergency
5. After the spare tire reaches the
ground, continue to turn the
wrench counterclockwise, and
draw the spare tire outside. Never
rotate the wrench excessively, oth-
erwise the spare tire carrier may
be damaged.
6. Remove the retainer (1) from the
center of the spare tire.
To store the spare tire:
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the
valve stem facing up.
2. Place the wheel under the vehicle
and install the retainer (1) through
the wheel center.
3. Turn the wrench clockwise until it
clicks.
OUM064007
WARNING
Ensure the spare tire retainer is
properly aligned with the center
of the spare tire to prevent the
spare tire from “rattling”.
Otherwise, it may cause the
spare tire to fall off the carrier
and lead to an accident.
OUM064006
What to do in an emergency
186
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park) with automatic transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
ers.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack and spare tire from the vehi-
cle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
from the jack position.
• To prevent vehicle movement while
changing a tire, always set the
parking brake fully, and always
block the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the wheel being changed.
• We recommend that the wheels of
the vehicle be blocked, and that no
person remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
OUMA064035
OUMA064034
619
What to do in an emergency
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7. Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing. Place
the jack at the designated loca-
tions under the frame. The jacking
positions are plates welded to the
frame with two tabs and a raised
dot to index with the jack.
8. Insert the wheel lug nut wrench
into the jack and turn it clockwise,
raising the vehicle until the tire just
clears the ground. This measure-
ment is approximately 1 in. (30
mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
OUM064008
OUM064021
OUM064009
OUM064010
What to do in an emergency
206
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can slide
over the other studs.
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid possi-
ble severe injury. Before putting the
wheel into place, be sure that there
is nothing on the hub or wheel (such
as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that pre-
vents the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the
studs and tighten them finger
tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
completely seated, then tighten
the nuts as much as possible
with your fingers again.
11. Insert the wrench into the jack
and lower the vehicle to the
ground by turning the wheel nut
wrench counterclockwise.
WARNING - Installing a
wheel
Make sure the wheel makes
good contact with the hub when
installed. If the contact of the
mounting surface between the
wheel and hub is not good, the
wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle.
621
What to do in an emergency
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are all tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
wheels, have an authorized Kia deal-
er tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
65~79 lbf·ft (11~13 kgf·m)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap
is not replaced, dust and dirt may get
into the tire valve and air may leak
from the tire. If you lose a valve cap,
buy another and install it as soon as
possible.
After you have changed the wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
Note that most lug nuts do not have
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION - Reusing lug
nuts
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud will
not secure the wheel to the hub
properly and will damage the
stud so that it must be replaced.
OUM064011
What to do in an emergency
226
To prevent the jack, wheel lug nut
wrench and spare tire from rattling
while the vehicle is in motion, store
them properly.
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing the
spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
“Tires and wheels” in section 8.
Important - use of compact spare
tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
• You should drive carefully when
the compact spare is in use. The
compact spare should be replaced
by the proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle is not
recommended with more than one
compact spare tire in use at the
same time.
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
✽✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel.This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
50 mph (80 km/h). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as possible to
avoid failure of the spare possi-
bly leading to personal injury or
death.
623
What to do in an emergency
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1
inch (25 mm), which could result in
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic vehicle wash while the
compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other vehicle com-
ponents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
What to do in an emergency
246
Jack label
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Move the shift lever to the P posi-
tion on vehicles with automatic
transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064001
OHYK064005
OHYK064002
• Type A
■ Example
• Type B
• Type C
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
625
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines informa-
tion, refer to “Trailer towing” in sec-
tion 5.
On AWD vehicles, your vehicle must
be towed with a wheel lift and dollies
or flatbed equipment with all the
wheels off the ground.
On FWD vehicles, it is acceptable to
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and
the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
OUM064022
dolly
dolly
WARNING - Side and
curtain Air bag
If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the
ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
position when the vehicle is
being towed.
The side and curtain air bag
may deploy when the ignition is
ON, and the rollover sensor
detects the situation as a
rollover.
CAUTION
The AWD vehicle should never
be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the
AWD system.
What to do in an emergency
266
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION - Towing gear
position
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
CAUTION - Towing
• Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
OUM064013
OUM064012
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-30
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
• Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
• Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
• Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
• Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
• Recharging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
• Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-53
• Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
• Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
• Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
• Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
• Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
• Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
• All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
• Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
• Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
7
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
• Inner panel fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
• Front lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
• Side repeater lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-89
• Rear combination lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . 7-90
• High mounted stop lamp replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
• License plate light bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
• Interior light bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
• Evaporative emission control (including orvr:
Onboard refueling vapor recovery) system . . . . . 7-102
• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
7
73
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OUM074100L
■■
Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.4L) - GDI
❈ The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Positive battery terminal
7. Negative battery terminal
8. Radiator cap
9. Engine oil dipstick
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
Maintenance
47
OUM074115L
■■
Gasoline Engine (Theta II 2.0L) – T-GDI
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Positive battery terminal
7. Negative battery terminal
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
75
Maintenance
OUMA074001
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Positive battery terminal
7. Negative battery terminal
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
10. Radiator cap
■■
Gasoline engine (Lambda II 3.3L) – GDI
* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Maintenance
67
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an authorized
Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized Kia dealer has factory
trained technicians and genuine Kia
parts to service your vehicle proper-
ly. For expert advice and quality serv-
ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Warranty & Consumer
Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
quality standards and receives tech-
nical support from Kia in order to pro-
vide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
77
Maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE - NHTSA Safety
Corrosion Alert
The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) has
issued a general warning to all vehi-
cle owners of all brands regarding
the risks associated with vehicle
underbody corrosion. From your
initial purchase, take the following
steps to prevent unsafe corrosion
damage to your vehicle:
• Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the win-
ter and whenever your vehicle has
been exposed to such salts or
chemicals.
• Do a thorough washing of the
undercarriage at the end of the
winter.
• Use professional service techni-
cians or governmental inspection
stations to annually inspect for
corrosion.
• Immediately seek an inspection of
your vehicle if you become visual-
ly aware of corrosion flaking or
scaling or if you become aware of
a change in vehicle performance,
such as soft or spongey brakes,
fluids leaking, impairment of
directional control, suspension
noises or rattling metal straps.
NHTSA further advises that after
a vehicle is 7 years old, it is essen-
tial that you take these indicated
maintenance steps to ensure that
you protect yourself from unsafe
corrosion conditions.
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized Kia dealer with spe-
cial tools.
✽✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty & Consumer
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance proce-
dure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
Maintenance
87
WARNING - Maintenance
work
Do not wear jewelry or loose
clothing while working under
the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
become entangled in moving
parts, if you must run the engine
while working under the hood,
make certain that you remove
all jewelry (especially rings,
bracelets, watches, and neck-
laces) and all neckties, scarves,
and similar loose clothing
before getting near the engine
or cooling fans.
79
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized Kia dealer at the frequencies
indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check the coolant level in the
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
WARNING - Hot coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure.
Maintenance
107
At least monthly:
• Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or
damage.
• Check the windshield washer
spray and wiper operation. Clean
the wiper blades with clean cloth
dampened with washer fluid.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean the body and door drain
holes.
• Lubricate the door hinges and
checks, and hood hinges.
• Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches.
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate the automat-
ic transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
711
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow the Normal Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the follow-
ing conditions apply, follow the
Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated driving short distance of
less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal
temperature or less than 10 miles
(16 km)in freezing temperature
• Extensive engine idling or low
speed driving for long distances
• Driving on rough, dusty, muddy,
unpaved, graveled or salt-spread
roads
• Driving in areas using salt or other
corrosive materials or in very cold
weather
• Driving in heavy dust condition
• Driving in heavy traffic area
• Driving on uphill, downhill, or
mountain road repeatedly
• Towing a trailer or using a camper,
or roof rack
• Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other
commercial use of vehicle towing
• Driving over 106 mile/h(170 km/h)
• Frequently driving in stop-and-go
condition
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should
inspect, replace or refill more fre-
quently than the following Normal
Maintenance Schedule. After 120
months or 150,000 miles continue to
follow the prescribed maintenance
intervals.
Maintenance
127
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one
bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are avail-
able from your authorized Kia dealer along with infor-
mation on how to use them. Do not mix other addi-
tives.
*
2
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be
maintenance free but periodic inspection is recom-
mended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediate-
ly regardless of maintenance schedule and consult
an authorized Kia dealer for details.
*
3
: Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed
anytime they have been submerged in water.
*
4
: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine
vibration and adjust if necessary.
*
5
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur
or tension is reduced excessively.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
713
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
Maintenance
147
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
715
Maintenance
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
Maintenance
167
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)- 2.0T-GDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
717
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
Maintenance
187
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
4
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 60,000 miles (100,000 km) or 60 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
719
Maintenance
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
(Continued)
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
Maintenance
207
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
(Continued)
82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
721
Maintenance
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - 2.4/3.3GDI
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)- 2.0T-GDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 60,000 miles (100,000 km) or 60 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
Maintenance
227
112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
723
Maintenance
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance *
4
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
(Continued)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 60,000 miles (100,000 km) or 60 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
Maintenance
247
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
725
Maintenance
(Continued)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated) - 2.0 T-GDI
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
(Continued)
Maintenance
267
142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *
3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *
3
(Continued)
727
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transaxle fluid
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *
6
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 60,000 miles (100,000 km) or 60 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *
1
(Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
*
6
: Engine oil (2.0 TGDI) Replace every 6,500miles
(10,000km) or 6 months
Maintenance
287
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
2.4L/3.3L R
EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM)
OR 6 MONTHS
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J, K
2.0L R
EVERY 3,000 MILES (5,000 KM)
OR 3 MONTHS
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY A, B, H, I, K
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) A, C, E, F, G, I
FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
729
Maintenance
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km)
in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez-
ing temperature
B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-
tances
C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E-Driving in heavy dust condition
F - Driving in heavy traffic area
G-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J -Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K- Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &
BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER
ARM BALL JOINT
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM)
OR 6 MONTHS
C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
TRANSFER CASE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
REAR AXLE OIL (AWD) R EVERY 75,000 MILES (120,000 KM) C, D, E, G, H, I, J
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
PROPELLER SHAFT I
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM)
OR 6 MONTHS
C, E
Maintenance
307
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the
vehicle is being driven in severe con-
ditions, more frequent oil and filter
changes are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked peri-
odically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (cartridge)
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
Fuel filters should be installed by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized Kia dealer
replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
731
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi-
dence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterio-
ration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con-
tact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving components which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance (if equipped)
Inspect for excessive valve noise
and/or engine vibration and adjust if
necessary. An authorized Kia dealer
should perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check the cooling system compo-
nents, such as the radiator, coolant
reservoir, hoses and connections for
leakage and damage. Replace any
damaged parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Maintenance
327
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
Kia dealer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the begin-
ning of this section.
✽✽
NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is the normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
✽✽
NOTICE - NHTSA Safety
Corrosion Alert
NHTSA has warned all vehicle own-
ers of all brands that they must
maintain their vehicles in a manner
which will prevent brake hose and
brake line failures due to corrosion
when such vehicles are exposed to
winter road salt and related chemi-
cals. While serious corrosion condi-
tions typically only manifest them-
selves as safety issues after 7 years of
vehicle use, the corrosion process
starts immediately and thus under-
body cleaning maintenance must
commence from your vehicle's first
exposure to road salts and chemi-
cals. NHTSA urges vehicle owners to
take the following steps to prevent
corrosion:
CAUTION
Use only specified automatic
transaxle fluid.The use of a non-
specified fluid could result in a
transaxle malfunction and fail-
ure. (Refer to "Recommended
lubricants and capacities" in
section 8.)
733
Maintenance
1. Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly throughout the
winter and do a thorough washing
in the spring to remove road salt
and other de-icing chemicals.
2. Monitor the brake system for
signs of corrosion by having regu-
lar professional inspections and
watching for signs of problems,
including loss of brake fluid,
unusual leaks and soft or spongy
feel in the brake pedal.
3. Replace the entire brake pipe
assembly if you find severe corro-
sion that causes scaling or flaking
of brake components.
Brake fluid
Check the brake fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir.The level should
be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks
on the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake lever (or
pedal) and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses (if equipped)
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately. Inspect the power
steering belt (or drive belt) for evi-
dence of cuts, cracks, excessive
wear, oiliness and proper tension.
Replace or adjust it if necessary.
Maintenance
347
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
735
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
CAUTION - Replacing
engine oil
Do not overfill the engine oil. It
may damage the engine.
OXM079004
OYP074062N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Maintenance
367
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Used
engine oil may cause irritation
or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for pro-
longed periods of time. Always
protect your skin by washing
your hands thoroughly with
soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used
oil.
OXM079005
OYP074045N
■ Type A
■ Type B
737
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year: at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
• Turn the engine off and wait until it
cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the cool-
ing system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclockwise
to remove it.
• Even if the engine is not operating,
do not remove the radiator cap or
the drain plug while the engine and
radiator are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out under
pressure, causing serious injury.
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
could result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
CAUTION - Radiator cap
Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine is
operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage.
Maintenance
387
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side
of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protec-
tion against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to F, but do not over-
fill. If frequent additions are required,
see an authorized Kia dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for
your vehicle and never mix hard
water in the coolant filled at the fac-
tory. An improper coolant mixture
can result in serious malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze. This would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
OUMA074221
WARNING - Cooling fan
Use caution when
working near the
blade of the cooling
fan. The electric
motor (cooling fan) is
controlled by engine coolant
temperature, refrigerant pres-
sure and vehicle speed. it may
sometimes operate even when
the engine is not running.
739
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
Changing the coolant
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such as
the alternator.
OXMA073007
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze Water
5°F (-15°C)
35 65
-13°F (-25°C)
40 60
-31°F (-35°C)
50 50
-49°F (-45°C)
60 40
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure which may result in
serious injury.
Maintenance
407
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX (Maximum) and MIN
(Minimum) marks on the side of the
reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX (Maximum) level. The level will
fall with accumulated mileage.This is
a normal condition associated with
the wear of brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an author-
ized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
or capacities” in chapter 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
Brake fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its quality
cannot be guaranteed. It should be
disposed of properly.
OYP074048K
CAUTION - Proper fluid
Only use brake fluid in brake
system. Small amounts of
improper fluids (such as engine
oil) can cause damage to the
brake system.
CAUTION -
Brake fluid
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result.
741
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
ODMNMC2019
OYP074049K
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING - Flammable
Fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to
come in contact with open
flames or sparks.The windshield
washer fluid reservoir is flamma-
ble under certain circumstances.
This can result in a fire.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING - Windshield
fluid
Do not drink the windshield
washer fluid. The windshield
washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
Maintenance
427
Checking the parking brake
Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 66 lb, 294 N
(30 kg) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Stroke : 8~9 notch
PARKING BRAKE
OCM050015
743
Maintenance
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
1. Pull out the air cleaner cover. 2. Unlock by turning the locking lever
upward.
3. Pull the air cleaner filter to replace.
4. Lock the cover with the reverse
order.
AIR CLEANER
OUM074007
OUM074008 OUMA074009
Maintenance
447
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this chapter.)
CAUTION - Air filter main-
tenance
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
745
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the mainte-
nance schedule. If the vehicle is
operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
1. Open the glove box and remove
the support strap (1).
2. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides.
OUM074011 OUM074012
Maintenance
467
3. Remove the climate control air fil-
ter case by pulling out right side of
the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly. Otherwise,
the system may produce noise and
the effectiveness of the filter may be
reduced.
OYP074008KOUM074013
747
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic vehicle washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial vehicle washes. If the blades are
not wiping properly, clean both the
window and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers manually.
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunc-
tion and failure.
1JBA5122
CAUTION - Wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Maintenance
487
Front windshield wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Rear window wiper blade
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out
the wiper blade assembly.
1LDA5023
CAUTION - Wiper arms
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
OHM078062
749
Maintenance
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot in the wiper arm until it clicks
into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
or other components, have an
authorized Kia dealer replace the
wiper blade.
OHM078063
Maintenance
507
BATTERY
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel
pain or burning sensation,
get medical attention imme-
diately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
Never attempt to recharge the bat-
tery when the battery cables are con-
nected.
WARNING - Risk of
explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and
all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
The battery contains
hydrogen -- a highly
combustible gas which
will explode if it comes
in contact with a flame or
spark.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID and
electrolytes. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
OUM074014
751
Maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE
If you connect unauthorized elec-
tronic devices to the battery, the bat-
tery may be discharged. Never use
unauthorized devices.
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlamps or interior
lamps lamps were left on while the
vehicle was not in use), recharge it
by slow charging (trickle) for 10
hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
CALIFORNIA PROPO-
SITION 65 WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
WARNING - Risk of elec-
trocution
Never touch the electrical igni-
tion system while the vehicle is
running. This system works
with high voltage which can
"zap" you.
Maintenance
527
Recharging battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area
with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or
flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging,
and stop or reduce the charging
rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if the
temperature of the electrolyte of
any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when check-
ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See chapter 4)
• Sunroof (See chapter 4)
• Trip computer (See chapter 4)
• Climate control system
(See chapter 4)
• Integrated Memory System
(See chapter 3)
• Audio (See chapter 4)
753
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
WARNING - Tire under
inflation
Inflate your tire consistent with
the instructions provided in this
manual. Severe under inflation
can lead to severe heat build-
up, causing blowouts, tread
separation and other tire fail-
ures that can result in the loss
of vehicle control. This risk is
much higher on hot days and
when driving for long periods at
high speeds.
OUM074049L
Maintenance
547
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel
deformation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater pos-
sibility of damage from road haz-
ards.
• Warm tires normally exceed rec-
ommended cold tire pressures by 4
to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not
release air from warm tires to
adjust the pressure or the tires will
be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation
valve caps. Without the valve cap,
dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been
parked for at least three hours or
hasn't been driven more than one
mile (1.6 km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres-
sure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle
luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one.
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when
they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
755
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
• Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear and
damage. Always use a tire pres-
sure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle con-
trol, and sudden tire failure leading
to accidents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on the tire
label located on the driver's side
center pillar.
• Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Kia recommends
that you check the spare every
time you check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.
Maintenance
567
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to left.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
WARNING - Mixing tires
• Do not use the compact spare
tire (if equipped) for tire rota-
tion.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics.
CAUTION - Wheel weight
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
CBGQ0707A
S2BLA790A
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
757
Maintenance
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. The tire size
affects wheel speed. When replacing
tires, all 4 tires must use the same
size originally supplied with the vehi-
cle. Using tires of a different size can
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) and ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) to work irregularly.
✽✽
NOTICE
We recommend that when replacing
tires, use the same which were origi-
nally supplied with the vehicle. If
not, driving performance could be
altered.
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
OEN076053
Tread wear indicator
CAUTION - Wheels
Wheels that do not meet Kia
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling and
poor vehicle control.
Maintenance
587
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
A wheel that is not the correct size
may adversely affect wheel and
bearing life, braking and stopping
abilities, handling characteristics,
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibra-
tion, headlamp aim and bumper
height.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. Slow down whenever there
is rain, snow or ice on the road to
reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the Tire Identification Number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
759
Maintenance
2.Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your vehicle. The fol-
lowing explains what the letters and
numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P235/65R17 108T
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
vehicles or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
235 - Tire width in millimeters.
65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s chapter
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
108 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this chapter
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0JX17
7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
Maintenance
607
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger vehicle tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2016.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
WARNING - Tire age
Replace tires within the recom-
mended time frame. Failure to
replace tires as recommended
can result in sudden tire failure,
which could lead to a loss of
control and an accident.
761
Maintenance
4.Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum chapter width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, we recom-
mend that tires be replaced after
approximately six (6) years of normal
service. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Maintenance
627
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger vehicle tires
must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic
transaxle, power seats, and air con-
ditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
763
Maintenance
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Light truck(LT) tire: A tire designat-
ed by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks
or multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load ratings: The maximum load
that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Maintenance
647
Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords
Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
device made of rubber, chemicals,
fabric and steel or other materials,
that, when mounted on an automo-
tive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains
the load.
Production options weight: The
combined weight of installed regular
production options weighing over 5
lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standard
items which they replace, not previ-
ously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
765
Maintenance
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
if you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your vehicle with snow
tires, they should be the same size
and have the same load capacity as
the original tires. Snow tires should
be installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your vehicle is equipped
with snow tires.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the front wheels.
Be sure that the chains are installed
in accordance with the manufactur-
er's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
• When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, drive at less than
20 mph (30 km/h).
• Use the SAE “S” class or wire chains.
• If you hear noise caused by chains
contacting the body, retighten the
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage, retighten
the chains after driving 0.3~0.6
miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels.
In unavoidable circumstance, use
a wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59
inches (15 mm) to prevent damage
to the chain’s connection.
Maintenance
667
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combina-
tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to fol-
low is: Identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this chap-
ter to achieve the tread life potential
of these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare to normal tires.
767
Maintenance
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize tire
damage with your own eyes.
But if there is the slightest
hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
Maintenance
687
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will melt.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized Kia
dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher
amperage ratings.
WARNING - Fuse
replacement
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
• Do not arbitrarily modify or
add-on electric wiring of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
OUM074043L
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
■ Multi fuse
Blown
NN
NN
oo
oo
rr
rr
mm
mm
aa
aa
ll
ll
BB
BB
ll
ll
oo
oo
ww
ww
nn
nn
Normal
Blown
■ BFT
NN
NN
oo
oo
rr
rr
mm
mm
aa
aa
ll
ll
BB
BB
ll
ll
oo
oo
ww
ww
nn
nn
769
Maintenance
✽✽
NOTICE
• When replacing fuse, turn the
ignition “OFF” and turn off
switches of all electrical devices
then remove battery (-) terminal.
• The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
If the switch is located in the “OFF”
position, a caution indicator will be
displayed in the cluster.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
on the engine compartment fuse
panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer.
OUMA074015
OUM074016
Maintenance
707
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the power outlet
fuse.
If the head lamp, turn signal lamp,
stop signal lamp, fog lamp, DRL, tail
lamp, HMSL do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the headlamp, fog lamp, turn sig-
nal lamp, or tail lamp malfunction
even without any problem to the
lamps, have the vehicle checked by
an authorized Kia dealer for assis-
tance.
✽✽
NOTICE - Fuse Panel Covers
• Put all switches in ON when driv-
ing.
• If the vehicle remains idle for over
1 month, put all switches in OFF
to prevent the batteries from being
discharged.
• Excluding long-term parking for
over 1 month, the contact points of
switches may wear out upon
extensive use. Please refrain from
excessive use of switches.
Fuse switch
Always, put the fuse switch at the ON
position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as audio
and digital clock must be reset and
transmitter (or smart key) may not
work properly. When the switch is
Off, the caution indicator will be dis-
played on the instrument cluster.
Always place the fuse switch in the
ON position while driving the vehicle.
OUMA074017
771
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up. When the blade type
fuse is disconnected, remove it by
using the clip designed for chang-
ing fuses located in the engine
room fuse box. Upon removal,
securely insert reserve fuse of
equal quantity.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized Kia dealer.
Multi fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
OUM074020
CAUTION - Fuse Panel
Covers
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover through the audible click-
ing sound.
If not, electrical failures may
occur from water contact.
OUM074018
Maintenance
727
✽✽
NOTICE
Do not disassemble nor assemble the
multi fuse when it is secured with
nuts and bolts. Incorrect or partial
assembly torque may cause a fire.
Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽✽
NOTICE
The electronic system may not func-
tion correctly even when the engine
room and internal fuse box’s indi-
vidual fuses are not disconnected. In
such case the cause of the problem
may be disconnection of the main
fuse (BFT type), which is located
inside the positive battery terminal
(+) cap.
Since the main fuse is designed more
intricately than other parts, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
Kia dealer.
OUMA074044
CAUTION
Visually inspect the battery cap
to ensure it is securely closed.
If the battery cap is not securely
closed, moisture may enter the
system and damage the electri-
cal components.
773
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽✽
NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
OUMA077220
OUMA074021
Maintenance
747
Description Fuse rating Protected component
AIR BAG IND. 10A Cluster, A/C Control Module
A/CON 3 30A Fuse - A/CON 2, Blower Motor
A/CON 2 7.5A A/C Control Module (Auto)
START 7.5A E/R Junction Block (Start Relay), Transaxle Range Switch
AIR BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor
MODULE 2 10A
Crash Pad Switch, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, 4WD ECM, Lane Departure Warning Module, Console
Switch, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Buzzer, Rear Parking Assist Sensor
LH/RH (Center), Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH, Electronic Parking Brake Module
ACC 10A
PCB Block (PDM (ACC) Relay, Power Outlet Relay), BCM, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Surround
View Monitoring Unit, Smart Key Control Module, AMP, USB Charger, Telematics Unit
MODULE 4 10A Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Head Lamp Leveling Device Actuator LH/RH
BRAKE SWITCH 7.5A Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch
MODULE 3 10A
A/C Control Module, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver IMS Control Module, ATM
Shift Lever Indicator, Rear Seat Warmer LH, Front Air Ventilation Control Module, Front Seat Warmer
Control Module, Telematics Unit
MODULE 1 10A BCM, Stop Lamp Switch, Driver/Passenger Doormodule
SMART KEY 1 15A Smart Key Control Module
775
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
A/CON (RR) 15A ICM Relay Box (Rear Blower Motor Relay)
SUNROOF 2 20A Sunroof Control Module (Roller)
SUNROOF 1 20A Sunroof Control Module (Glass)
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster
GATEWAY 10A Gateway (MCU IG1)
IMMO. 10A Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
IG1 15A E/R Junction Block (Fuse - MDPS 3, TCU 1), PCB Block (Fuse - ABS 3, SENSOR 6, ECU 1, CRUISE)
MULTIMEDIA 15A USB Charger, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Telematics Unit
MEMORY 2 10A Instrument Cluster, Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module, Rear A/C Control Module, Clock Spring,
DOOR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Relay, DRIVER/PASSENGER/RL/RR DOOR MODULE
SMART KEY 2 10A Start/Stop Button Switch, Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
WASHER 15A BCM, Multifunction Switch
AEB 10A AEB Unit
MDPS 7.5A MDPS UNIT(COLUMN TYPE), Steering Angle Sensor
Maintenance
767
Description Fuse rating Protected component
MEMORY 1 10A BCM
HEATED
STEERING
15A BCM
WIPER (RR) 15A Rear Wiper Relay, Rear Wiper Motor
A/CON 1 7.5A
A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay), ICM Relay Box (Rear Blower Motor
Relay)
HEATED MIRROR 10A A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
MODULE 5 10A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
MODULE 6 7.5A
Surround View Monitoring Unit, Rear A/C Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer LH, Front Air Ventilation
Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, AC Inverter Module, Crash Pad Switch
S/HEATER (RR) 15A Rear Seat Warmer LH
S/HEATER (FRT) 20A Front Air Ventilation Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module
P/WINDOW (RH) 25A
Rear Safety Power Window RH, Rear Power Window Switch RH, Passenger Safety Power Window Module,
Passenger Door Module, Passenger Power Window Switch
AMP 1 25A AMP
MODULE 7 7.5A Gateway (MCU B+), Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module
777
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
INTERIOR LAMP 10A
Glove Box Lamp, Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch, Driver Foot Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH Switch,
Cargo Lamp, Center Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH
FUEL LID 10A Fuel Filler & Tail Gate Switch
P/SEAT (DRV) 30A Driver IMS Control Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch
P/SEAT (PASS) 30A Passenger Seat Manual Switch
AMP 2 25A AMP
P/WINDOW (LH) 25A
Rear Safety Power Window LH, Rear Power Window Switch LH, Driver Safety Power Window Module,
Driver Door Module
Maintenance
787
Engine compartment fuse panel
OUMA074050
OUM074023
779
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
MULTI
FUSE
MDPS 1 100A MDPS Unit (Rack Type)
MDPS 2 80A MDPS Unit (Column Type)
COOLING
FAN 1
80A Cooling Fan 1 Relay
B+1 60A IGPM (Fuse - S/HEATER (RR), P/SEAT (DRV), P/SEAT (PASS), P/WINDOW (LH))
B+2 60A IGPM (Fuse - S/HEATER (FRT), P/WINDOW (RH), FULE LID, AMP 1, AMP 2)
B+3 60A
IGPM (IPS 1, Fuse - MODULE 7, Leak Current Autocut Device Fuse - MULTIMEDIA, MEMORY 2,
MEMORY 1), INTERIOR LAMP
B+5 50A IGPM (IPS 0/IPS 2/IPS 3/IPS 4/IPS 5/IPS 6/IPS 7/IPS 8, Fuse - S/ROOF 1)
FUSE
B+4 40A
IGPM (Fuse - DOOR LOCK, SMART KEY 1, SMART KEY 2, BRAKE SWITCH, A/CON (RR),
S/ROOF 2)
ABS 2 20A ESC Module
ABS 1 40A ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
INVERTER 30A AC Inverter Module
POWER TAIL
GATE
30A Power Tail Gate Module
TRAILER 30A Trailer Power Outlet
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
Maintenance
807
Description Fuse rating Protected component
FUSE
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
VACUUM
PUMP
20A [G4KH] Vacuum Pump
TCU 2 15A [G4KJ/G4KH] PCM
EPB 1 15A Electronic Parking Brake Module
EPB 2 15A Electronic Parking Brake Module
4WD 20A 4WD ECM
ECU 2 15A PCM
ECU 3 15A [G6DH] IDB (Injector Driver Box)
MDPS 3 7.5A MDPS Unit (Rack Type)
TCU 1 10A Transaxle Range Switch
B/UP LAMP 7.5A Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH, BCM, Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio(UVO)
781
Maintenance
Description Fuse rating Protected component
ABS 3 7.5A ESC Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ECU 1 10A PCM, [G6DH] IDB (Injector Driver Box)
IG 2 40A RLY. 4 (Start Relay), PDM (IG2) Relay, Ignition Switch
POWER
OUTLET 1
20A Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter
SENSOR 6 7.5A [G4KH] Brake Vacuum Switch, Vacuum Pump
POWER
OUTLET 2
20A Front Power Outlet
CRUISE 7.5A Smart Cruise Control Radar
ECU 4 20A [G4KJ/G4KH] PCM (E-CVVT Relay)
WIPER 25A Wiper Low Relay
DEICER 15A Front Deicer Relay
ECU 5 20A [G4KJ/G4KH] PCM (E-CVVT Relay)
IG 1 40A PDM (IG1) Relay, PDM (ACC) Relay, Ignition Switch
SENSOR 4 10A
[G4KJ/G4KH] Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down)
[G6DH] PCM, Oxygen Sensor #1/#2/#3/#4
SENSOR 5 15A
[G4KJ/G4KH]PCM
[G6DH] IDB (Injector Driver Box)
Maintenance
827
Description Fuse rating Protected component
POWER
OUTLET 3
20A Rear Power Outlet
SENSOR 1 20A [G4KJ/G4KH] Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4 [G6DF] Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6, Condecser #1/#2
SENSOR 3 10A [G4KJ/G4KH] Fuel Pump Relay [G6DF] Fuel Pump Relay, PCM
POWER
OUTLET 4
20A Luggage Power Outlet
REAR
HEATED
40A Rear Defogger Relay
SENSOR 2 10A
[G4KJ/G4KH] E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan 1 Relay), Oil Control Valve (Exhaust), Purge Control Solenoid
Valve, Canister Close Valve, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, RCV Control Solenoid Valve (G4KH)
[G6DH] E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan 1 Relay), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve #1/#2, Purge Control
Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/#2/#3/#4 (Intake/Exhaust), PCM, Canister close valve
FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
HORN 15A Horn Relay
B/ALARM
HORN
10A Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
783
Maintenance
Relay NO. Relay Name Type
E31 Blower Relay MICRO
E32 START #2 Relay MICRO
E33 Cooling Fan #1 Relay MINI
Maintenance
847
LIGHT BULBS
Please prepare lamps with appropri-
ate standards in case of emergen-
cies. (Refer to chapter 8 for further
information)
When changing lamps and sorts,
first turn off the engine at a safe
place, firmly apply the side brake and
take out the battery’s negative (-) ter-
minal.
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽✽
NOTICE
• If the light bulb or lamp connector
is removed from an operating
lamp activated by electricity, the
fuse box’s electronic device may
scan it as a malfunction.
Therefore, a lamp malfunction
history may be recorded in
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in
the fuse box.
• It is normal for an operating lamp
may blink temporarily. Since this
occurrence is due stabilization
function of the vehicle’s electronic
control device, if the lamp lights
up normally after temporary
blinking, there is no problem in
the vehicle.
However, if the lamp continues to
blink several times or turn off
completely, there may be an error
in the vehicle’s electronic control
device. So please have the vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer immediately.
WARNING -
Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION - Light replace-
ment
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
CAUTION - Headlamp
Lens
To prevent damage, do not
clean headlamp lens with chem-
ical solvents or strong deter-
gents.
785
Maintenance
If you don’t have necessary tools, the
correct bulbs and the expertise, con-
sult an authorized Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to replace
vehicle light bulbs because other
parts of the vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.This is
especially true if you have to remove
the headlamp assembly to get to the
bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.
If unauthentic parts or substandard
lights are used when changing lights,
it may lead to fuse disconnection and
malfunction, and other wiring dam-
ages.
Do not install extra lamps or LED to
the vehicle. If supplementary lights
are installed, it may lead to lamp mal-
function and flickering of the lights. In
addition, the fuse box and other writ-
ing may be damaged.
Front lamp bulb replacement
(1) Headlamp(High)
(2) Headlamp(Low)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Side marker lamp
(5) Position lamp
(6) Fog lamp (if equipped)
OUMA074027
OUMA074114
■ Type A
■ Type B
Maintenance
867
Headlamp bulb
• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids. Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat and
burst when lit. A bulb should be
operated only when installed in a
headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when chang-
ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
WARNING - HID
Headlamp low beam
(if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the light bulb does not
operate, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Kia
dealer.
OXM079200N
WARNING - Halogen
bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care.
• Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce
flying pieces of glass if bro-
ken.
787
Maintenance
Headlamp (bulb type) -high/low
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly
from the body of the vehicle
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it out.
6. Inset a new bulb into the socket.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.
Turn signal lamp
Follow the steps 1 to 3 from the pre-
vious page.
4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket
OUM074108L
Turn signal
OUM074053L
High lamp
Low lamp
Maintenance
887
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
✽✽
NOTICE
If bulb will not rotate inside socket,
remove bulb, rotate 180°, and try
again.
Front fog lamp bulbs
(if equipped)
1. Remove the front bumper under
cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on
the socket with the slots in the
housing. Push the socket into the
housing and turn the socket clock-
wise.
6. Connect the power connector to
the socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under
cover.
✽✽
NOTICE
Always have the headlamp aiming
adjusted after an accident or after
the headlamp assembly is reinstalled
at an authorized Kia dealer.
OUMA074109
789
Maintenance
Headlamp low (HID), Position
lamp (LED)/Side marker
lamp(LED) replacement
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
✽✽
NOTICE
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer
to last twice as long or longer than
halogen bulbs depending on their
frequency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point
in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the
same manner as halogen incandes-
cent lamps. If a headlamp goes out
after a period of operation but will
immediately relamp when the head-
lamp switch is cycled it is likely the
HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID
lamping components are more com-
plex than conventional halogen
bulbs thus have higher replacement
cost.
Side repeater lamp replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not
operate,have the vehicle checked by
an authorized Kia dealer. A skilled
technician should check or repair the
side repeater lamp, for it may dam-
age related out side mirror parts of
the vehicle.
OUM074028
Maintenance
907
Rear combination lamp bulb
replacement
Outside lamp
Type A
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Open the service cover.
3. Remove the nuts from the vehicle.
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.
OUMA074031
OUM074032
OUM074033
OUM074030L
OUM074029
■ Type A
■ Type B
Stop&tail
Tail
Turn signal
Back up
Turn signal
Back up
Stop&tail
Stop&tail
Side marker
Side marker
791
Maintenance
5. Disconnect the connector
between lamp and the body.
6. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
9. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
10. Reinstall the light assembly to
the body of the vehicle.
* If your vehicle is equipped with LED
type stop and tail lamps replace
with LED assembled units. Please
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
Type B (Stop and tail lamp)
If the lamp bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Inside lamp
OUMA074035
OUMA074112
OUM074036
■ Type A
■ Type B
OUM074034
OUMA074111
■ Type A
■ Type B
Maintenance
927
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the service cover.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting
it into the service hole.
* If your vehicle is equipped with LED
type stop and tail lamps replace
with LED assembled units. Please
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
High mounted stop lamp
replacement
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Gently remove the center cover of
the rear tailgate trim.
3. Disconnect the electrical connec-
tor.
4. Loosen the retaining nuts and
remove the spoiler.
OUM074056L
ODMEMC2019
OUMA074232
793
Maintenance
5. Remove the high mounted stop
lamp assembly (A) after loosening
the nuts and washer nozzle (B).
6. Reinstall a new lamp assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
License plate lamp bulb
replacement
1. Loosen the lens retaining screws
with a phillips head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.
OUMA074231
OUMA074230
B
A
Maintenance
947
Interior lamp bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interi-
or light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
✽✽
NOTICE
If the LED lamp does not operate,
we recommend that you checked on
authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING - Interior
lamps
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
■ Room lamp
■ Map lamp
■ Glove box lamp
■ Luggage lamp
■ Vanity mirror lamp
OUM074039/OUM074040/OUM074041/
OYP074032K/OXM079041
795
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate-
rials. Make sure the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors and rocker
panels are kept clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired, dry
the brakes by applying them lightly
while maintaining a slow forward
speed.
CAUTION - Headlight Lens
To prevent damage, do not
clean headlight lens with chem-
ical solvents or strong deter-
gents.
Maintenance
967
High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure wash-
ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
cient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not oper-
ate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers) or
connectors as they may be dam-
aged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
Do not apply wax on embossed
unpainted unit, as it may tarnish the
unit.
OJB037800
CAUTION - Wet engine
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
797
Maintenance
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or replace-
ment, be sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to the parts
repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Road salt and other corrosive chem-
icals are used in cold weather states
to melt snow and prevent ice accu-
mulation. If these chemicals are not
regularly removed, they will corrode
the vehicle underbody and over time
damage fuel lines, the fuel tank
retention system, the vehicle sus-
pension, the exhaust system, and
even the body frame. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
has warned all vehicle owners of all
brands of the need to take the follow-
ing steps:
• Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the winter
and whenever your vehicle has
been exposed to such salts or
chemicals.
• Do a thorough washing of the
undercarriage at the end of the
winter.
CAUTION - Drying vehicle
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, acid detergents
or strong detergents contain-
ing high alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or
anodized aluminum parts.
This may result in damage to
the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
Maintenance
987
• Use professional service techni-
cians or governmental inspection
stations to annually inspect for cor-
rosion.
• Immediately seek an inspection of
your vehicle if you become visually
aware of corrosion flaking or scal-
ing or if you become aware of a
change in vehicle performance,
such as soft or spongey brakes,
fluids leaking, impairment of direc-
tional control, suspension noises
or rattling metal straps.
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
highspeed vehicle wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergents It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produce vehicles of
the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also
required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
799
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi-
cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the vehicle’s surface by
moisture that evaporates slowly.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it dries slowly and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials. This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
beginning by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is partic-
ularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
Maintenance
1007
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
poorly ventilated garage. This cre-
ates a favorable environment for cor-
rosion. This is particularly true if you
wash your vehicle in the garage or
drive it into the garage when it is still
wet or covered with snow, ice or
mud. Even a heated garage can con-
tribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting and cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the vehicle.
These should be carried only in prop-
er containers and any spills or leaks
should be cleaned up, flushed with
clean water and thoroughly dried.
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. If neces-
sary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product
instructions for correct usage.
CAUTION - Electrical
components
Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
7101
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with a
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION - Rear window
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage of the rear
window defroster grid.
CAUTION - Leather
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alco-
hol content solutions. If you use
high alcohol content solutions
or acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade or
the surface may get stripped off.
Maintenance
1027
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Maintenance booklet in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized Kia dealer in accor-
dance with the maintenance sched-
ule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refu-
eling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
7103
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control sole-
noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or
durability and may even violate gov-
ernmental safety and emissions reg-
ulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
Maintenance
1047
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Catalytic
converter
Keep away from the catalytic
converter and exhaust system
while the vehicle is running or
immediately thereafter. The
exhaust and catalytic systems
are very hot and may burn you.
WARNING - Fire
• Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma-
ble objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
7105
Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, dam-
aging the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
Perchlorate Material-special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz-
ardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials,
such as air bag inflators, seatbelt
pretensioners and keyless remote
entry batteries, must be disposed of
according to Title 22 California Code
of Regulations Chapter 67384.10
(a).
CALIFORNIA
PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Gross vehicle weight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended sae viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Consumer assistance (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Electrical equipment (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Reporting safety defects (U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Online factory authorized manuals
(U.S. Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
28
DIMENSIONS
ENGINE
ITEM 5 Seats 7 Seats
Overall length [in. (mm)] 187.4 (4,760)
←
Overall width [in. (mm)] 74.4 (1,890)
←
Overall height
[in. (mm)]
Without Roof rack 66.3 (1,685)
←
With Roof rack 66.5 (1,690)
←
Tread
[in. (mm)]
Front
235/65 R17 64.2 (1,633)
←
235/60 R18 64.0 (1,628)
←
235/55 R19 64.0 (1,628)
←
Rear
235/65 R17 64.7 (1,644)
←
235/60 R18 64.5 (1,639)
←
235/55 R19 64.5 (1,639)
←
Wheelbase [in. (mm)] 109.4 (2,780)
←
ITEM
Gasoline
Theta II 2.0 T-GDI
Gasoline
Theta II 2.4
Gasoline
Lambda II 3.3
Displacement
[cu. in (cc)]
121.92 (1,998) 143.95 (2,359) 203.94 (3,342)
Bore x Stroke
[in. (mm)]
3.39x3.39 (86x86) 3.46X3.81 (88x97)
3.62X3.29
(92x83.8)
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-2-3-4-5-6
No. of cylinders 4. In-line 4. In-line V - type
83
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
BULB WATTAGE
* If equipped
Light Bulb Wattage (W) Bulb type
Front
Headlamps (Low) 55 H7SPL
Headlamps (Low) - HID type* 35 D3S
Headlamps (High) 55 H7L
Front turn signal lamps 27W PY27/8W
Front position lamps
Bulb type - -
LED type LED LED
Daytime running light* 55W H7L
Front fog lamps
Type A 35 H8L
Type B 27 #881
Type C LED LED
Side Repeater lamps
Bulb type - -
LED type LED LED
Rear
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)
Bulb type
21/5 P21/5
Rear tail lamps (Inside) 5 P21/5
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside)
LED type
LED LED
Rear tail lamps (Inside) LED LED
Rear turn signal lamps 27 PY27W
Back-up lamps 16 W16W
High mounted stop lamp LED LED
License plate lamps 10W C5W x 2
Interior
Map lamps 20 (LED*) FESTOON (LED*)
Room lamps 10 FESTOON
Rear Personal Lamps LED* LED*
Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Luggage room lamp 8 FESTOON
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
48
TIRES AND WHEELS
CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can
damage the related parts or make them work irregularly.
*
1
: Load Index
*
2
: Speed Symbol
*
3
: Normal load : Up to 3 persons
✽✽
NOTICE
• It is permissible to add 3psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.
Tires typically loose 1psi for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, re-
check your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
• We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects
driving performance.
• When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please
check the tire pressure and add more air when necessary.
Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 1.5psi/km
Item Tire size
Wheel
size
Supplier
Load
Capacity
Speed
capacity
Inflation pressure [bar(psi, kPa)]
Wheel lug
nut torque
[Kgf·m
(lbf·ft, N·m)]
Normal load *
3
Maximum load
LI *
1
Kg SS *
2
Km/h Front Rear Front Rear
Full size
tire
235/65 R17 7.0JX17
Kumho 104 900 H 210
2.35
(34, 235)
2.35
(34, 235)
2.35
(34, 235)
2.35
(34, 235)
9~11
(65~79,
88~107)
Hankook 104 900 H 210
235/60 R18 7.5JX18
Kumho 103 875 H 210
2.35
(34, 235)
2.35
(34, 235)
2.35
(34, 235)
2.35
(34, 235)
Nexen 103 875 H 210
235/55 R19 7.5JX19
Kumho 101 825 H 210
2.35
(34, 235)
2.35
(34, 235)
2.35
(34, 235)
2.35
(34, 235)
Michelin 101 825 H 210
Compact
spare tire
T165/90 R17 4.0TX17 Kumho 116 1250 M 130
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
4.2
(60, 420)
85
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
LUGGAGE VOLUME
Item Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant
FRONT A/CON 650 ± 25g
R-134a
FRONT + REAR A/CON 850 ± 25g
Compressor lubricant
FRONT A/CON 120 ± 10g
PAG(FD46XG)
FRONT + REAR A/CON 210 ± 10g
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
ITEM
FOR USA FOR CANADA
5 Seats 7 Seats 5 Seats 7 Seats
Theta II 2.0
[lbs. (kg)]
AT
2WD 5,115 (2,320) 5,445 (2,470) 5,115 (2,320) 5,445 (2,470)
4WD 5,247 (2,380) 5,578 (2,530) 5,247 (2,380) 5,578 (2,530)
Theta II 2.4
[lbs. (kg)]
AT
2WD 5,026 (2,280) 5,335 (2,420) 5,026 (2,280) 5,335 (2,420)
4WD 5,159 (2,340) 5,490 (2,490) 5,159 (2,340) 5,490 (2,490)
Lambda II 3.3
[lbs. (kg)]
AT
2WD - 5,489 (2,490) - 5,489 (2,490)
4WD - 5,622 (2,550) - 5,622 (2,550)
ITEM 5 Seats 7 Seats
SAE
MIN. 38.8 cu ft (1,099L) 38.0 cu ft (1,077L)
MAX. 73.5 cu ft (2,082L) 72.9 cu ft (2,066L)
MIN : Behind rear seat (2nd row)
MAX : Behind front seat (1st row)
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
68
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends (or equivalent)
Gasoline
Engine
Theta II 2.0
T-GDI
5.07 US qt. (4.8 l)
ACEA A5 or above
* If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in
your country, you are able to use API service
SL, IL SAC GF-3, ACEA A3.
Theta II 2.4 GDI
5.07 US qt. (4.8 l)
API Service SM or above/
ILSAC GF-4 or above/ACEA A5 or above
* If the API service SM, ILSAC GF-4, ACEA A5
engine oil is not available in your country, you
are able to use API service SL, IL SAC GF-3,
ACEA A3.
Lambda II 3.3
GDI
6.02 US qt. (5.7 l)
ACEA A5 or above
* If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in
your country, you are able to use API service
SL, IL SAC GF-3, ACEA A3.
Automatic transaxle fluid
Gasoline
Engine
Theta II 2.0
T-GDI
8.24 US qt. (7.8 l)
ATF SP-IV or equivalentTheta II 2.4 GDI
7.50 US qt. (7.1 l)
Lambda II 3.3
GDI
8.24 US qt. (7.8 l)
87
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-
omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant
Gasoline
Engine
Theta II 2.0
T-GDI
7.71 US qt. (7.3 l)
Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum
radiator)
Theta II 2.4 GDI
8.35 US qt. (7.9 l)
Lambda II 3.3
GDI
9.83 US qt. (9.3 l)
Brake fluid
0.445~0.485 US qt.
(0.41~0.45 l)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Rear differential oil (AWD)
0.56 ~ 0.67 US qt.
(0.53 ~ 0.63 l)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W90 or equivalent)
Transfer case oil (AWD)
Gasoline
Engine
Theta II 2.0
T-GDI
0.36 ~ 0.38 US qt.
(0.34 ~ 0.36 l)
HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W90 or equivalent)
Theta II 2.4 GDI
0.36 ~ 0.38 US qt.
(0.34 ~ 0.36 l)
Lambda II 3.3
GDI
0.70 ~ 0.77 US qt.
(0.67 ~ 0.73 l)
Fuel
75 US qt. (71 l)
Refer to Fuel requirements in section 1
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
88
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be
damaged. Engine oil viscosity (thick-
ness) has an effect on fuel economy
and cold weather operating (engine
start and engine oil flowability).
Lower viscosity engine oils can pro-
vide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however,
higher viscosity engine oils are
required for satisfactory lubrication in
hot weather. Using oils of any viscos-
ity other than those recommended
could result in engine damage.When
choosing an oil, consider the range
of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil
change. Proceed to select the rec-
ommended oil viscosity from the
chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Gasoline Engine Oil
(Theta II 2.0 T-GDI) *
1
20W-50
10W-30
15W-40
5W-30, 5W-40
*
1
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil
is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using
the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
2
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA A5).
However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the
proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*
3
: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil
is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using
the engine oil viscosity chart.
Gasoline Engine Oil
(
Theta II 2.4 GDI
)
*
2
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
Gasoline Engine Oil
(
Lambda II 3.3 GDI
)
*
3
10W-30
5W-30
89
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat-
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OUM084001
■ Frame number
OUM084005
■ VIN label
OUM084004
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
108
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
The refrigerant label is located on
the underside of the hood.
ENGINE NUMBERTIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
REFRIGERANT LABEL
OUM084002
OUM084006
OYF081013N
OUM084007
OYP084003K
■ Gasoline engine (THETA 2.4L GDI)
■ Gasoline engine (THETA 2.0L T-GDI)
■ Gasoline engine (Lambda 3.3L GDI)
811
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current
model year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is deliv-
ered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-
service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60
months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to
the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia
Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable
to your model year vehicle.
KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other
benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment,
the claims and/or service requests are excessive in fre-
quency or type of occurrence.
Toll free consumer assistance
Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed
from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday
and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542).
For more information regarding assistance available,
please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer
Information Manual.
Emergency roadside assistance
Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24
hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing
1-800-333-4Kia (4542).
Please note that you must provide your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time
of your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of your
vehicle on the driver’s side, on the door jamb of the dri-
ver’s door, your vehicle’s registration or proof of insur-
ance card.
Kia utilizes a network of over 30,000 roadside assistance
providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require
a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia
Roadside Assistance Representative will dispatch some-
one to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tire
with your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump to
allow you to proceed to your destination.We have access
to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to help you should
you become locked out of your Kia.
In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehi-
cle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s
Roadside Assistance Representative will arrange to
transport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to an
authorized Kia alternative service location.
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
128
Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport
vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this serv-
ice.
✽✽
NOTICE
Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any
Kia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “sal-
vage” title or similar “branded” title under any state’s
law or has been declared a “total loss” or equivalent by
a financial institution or insurance company.
Trip interruption
Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the
event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more
than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require
more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimburse-
ment is included for meals, lodging, or rental vehicle
expenses. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100
per day subject to a three day maximum limit per incident.
You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center to
obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia
Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for trip
interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the
necessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles,
expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or
other providers are not eligible for reimbursement.
Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under
Kia’s Trip Interruption Policy.
813
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country
If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country,
you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in
that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle
in a foreign country, you may experience the following
problems and should therefore consider the possibility of
having to deal with them:
1. The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
If other than the specified fuel is used, it could cause
damage to the engine, the fuel injection system, and
other fuel-related parts which may not be covered
under your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty.
2. We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave
the country in which you purchased your Kia new and
register it in another country, problems arising from the
use of fuel other than the specified fuel are not subject
to manufacturer’s warranty. Because vehicles like
yours may not be marketed in the new country of reg-
istration, parts, servicing techniques and tools neces-
sary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical
specifications required by the government may vary
enough from the country of purchase to cause addi-
tional problems.
3. There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area
in which you plan to register your vehicle. You may
additionally experience difficulty in obtaining services
in a foreign country for any number of reasons.
Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for prob-
lems that result from unsatisfactory service or lack of
service outside of the United States.
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
148
The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to per-
form under all reasonably expected operating conditions.
However, before any additional electrical equipment is
installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia
Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your war-
ranty.
Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is
installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehi-
cle, including such systems as the engine control system,
the audio system and the electrical charging system and
thus potentially void all or part of your warranty.
We assume no responsibility for any expense you may
incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its
components or systems that may result from the installa-
tion of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied,
or recommended for installation by, Kia.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly,
or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other
electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid
damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer
concerning the proper equipment and installation.
Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to
meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read
and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particu-
larly the information under the headings "NOTICE",
"CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions
regarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and
defects please contact your Kia's toll-free Consumer
Assistance hot line as below:
National Consumer Affairs Manager
Kia Motors America, Inc.
P.O. Box 52410
Irvine, CA 92619-2410
1-800-333-4Kia (4542)
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)
815
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia
Motors America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors
America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., West
Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
The following publications are available on
www.KiaTechinfo.com
Service manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended pro-
cedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It
is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically inclined owners to under-
stand.
Electrical troubleshooting manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by provid-
ing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical
circuit in your vehicle.
Owner's manual:
This manual describes the overall features and operating
procedures for the vehicle.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS
(U.S. ONLY)
Index
I
I
Index
2
I
A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
AC inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Adjusting outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Advanced smart cruise control system (ASCC). . . . . . 5-65
Speed setting (ASCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC). . . . . . . 5-70
To adjust the sensitivity of Advanced Smart
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
To convert to cruise control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Limitations of the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Air bags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Driver's and passenger's front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Inflation and non-inflation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
SRS Carel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Air conditioning system (Lubricants). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Airconditioning system
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
All wheel drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Tight corner brake effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
All Wheel Drive (AWD) transfer mode selection . . 5-22
For safe all wheel drive operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
Exterior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Assist Emergency Braking (AEB)/
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
AEB warning message and system control . . . . . . . 5-52
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle
in front (front radar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Recognizing pedestrians. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-170
Steering wheel remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
Aux, USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
How vehicle audio works. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
Using iPod
®
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
A
I
3
Index
AUTO HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Auto light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-141
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
3rd row air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Manual mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Shift-lock override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-172
AWD (All wheel drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Blind Spot Detection System(BSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Bonnet see the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Parking brake - Foot type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
AUTO HOLD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Brakes fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . 5-9
Camera (Rear view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Capacities (Lubricants). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Care
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
SRS Carel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Exterior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Central door lock switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Chains - Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
B
C
Index
4
I
Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . 4-72
Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Compact spare tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Consumer assistance(U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
To set cruise control speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Dashboard, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Day/night rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Defogging (Windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Defroster (Rear window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Defrosting (Windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Displays, see instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
From outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
From inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Central door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Drinks holders, see cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Drive mode (Drive mode integrated control system). . 5-81
Drive mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
DRIVE mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
ECO mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
SPORT mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Driver's and passenger's front air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Driving at night. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
ECO mode (Drive mode integrated control system) . . 5-81
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Electric chromatic mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
D
E
I
5
Index
Electric chromatic mirror with compass . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Electronic parking brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Electric power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Electrical equipment(U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Electrochromic mirror with HomeLink system . . . . . . 4-63
Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Emergency fuel filler lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Emergency Liftgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Emergency while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Evaporative emission control System . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Illuminated engine start/stop button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine start/stop button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Engine start/stop button illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine start/stop button position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Evaporative emission control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-30
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
Exterior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Exterior overview (Front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Exterior overview (Rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Fluid
Brakes fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Fog light (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Folding Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
F
Index
6
I
Folding key battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Front seat adjustment (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Front seat adjustment (power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Emergency fuel filler lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuse switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
Instrument panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Fuse switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
Multi fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Main fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Gross vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Hazard warning flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Hazardous driving conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Headlight bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-85
Headlight position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Headrest(rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Heated steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Heater
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Hight adjustment (seat belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-173
Icy road warning indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Ignition switch illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Immobilizer system (folding key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Immobilizer system (smart key). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Instrument panel illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
G
H
I
I
7
Index
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Trip modes (trip computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
ASCC/LDWS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
A/V Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
User settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Instrument panel fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Interior care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
Bottle holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Seat cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
USB charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
AC inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-167
Side curtain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
Luggage net holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
Interior lamp AUTO turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Interior lamp AUTO turn off function . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Luggage lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Illuminated ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Ignition switch position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
J
K
Index
8
I
Label
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Liftgate (for manual type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Emergency Liftgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Parking & Tail light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Auto light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Headlight position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117
Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Luggage lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Luggage volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Main fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Maintenance
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . 7-30
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
3rd row air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137
Manual mode - Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Day/night rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Electric chromatic mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Electric chromatic mirror with compass . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Electrochromic mirror with HomeLink system . . . . 4-63
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
M
L
I
9
Index
Adjusting outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
Reverse parking aid function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Outside rearview mirror folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Multi fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
Occupant Detection System (ODS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
ODS see the Occupant Detection System . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
One time driving information mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Online factory authorized manuals(U.S. only). . . . . . . 8-15
Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Outside rearview mirror folding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Outside Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Panoramic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Closing the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Parking & Tail light position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Parking brake - Foot type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Power brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Emergency Liftgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Smart power liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Power Liftgate non-opening conditions . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Power Liftgate opening height user setting . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Power Liftgate non-opening conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Power Liftgate opening height user setting. . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Power window lock button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Rear parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Type of warning sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
Rear seat adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Reducing the risk of a rollover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Replacement light bulb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
P
R
O
Index
10
I
Reporting safety defects(U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Reverse parking aid function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-169
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Rotation (Tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Seat belt precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Lap/shoulder belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
3 Point system seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Hight adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Stowing the rear seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Seat cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
Seatback pocket (front). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front seat adjustment (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Front seat adjustment (power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Driver position memory system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Headrest(front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Seatback pocket (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Headrest(rear). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Shift-lock override - Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Side curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-168
Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Smart ket battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Smart Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Loss of the smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Smart key immobilizer system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Smart key immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Smart key precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Smart power liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Spare tire
S
I
11
Index
Removing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Compact spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Compact spare tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Reducing the risk of a rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Smooth cornering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
SPORT mode (Drive mode integrated control system). . 5-82
SRS Carel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start. . . . . . . . . 6-4
Starting the engine - With a smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Starting the engine - With an ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Electric power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Tilt and telescopic steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Steering wheel remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-171
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-157
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Luggage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
Stowing the rear seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
Surround view monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
T
Index
12
I
Tires and wheels
Recommended cold tireinflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-53
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Compact spare tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Low aspect ratio tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Transaxle - Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Transaxle shift indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Trip modes (trip computer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Turn signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
USB charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
User settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
Using iPod
®
device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-179
Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-177
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Warning and Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Headlight (Headlamp) escort function. . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
U
V
W
I
13
Index
Pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Power window lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Winter driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Snow tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
3 Point system seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
ETC
